JP2018139961A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[PROBLEMS] To prevent the possibility of causing a decrease in gaming interest in a specific state such as an ART state. A main control board 300 controls a normal period and a special period different from the normal period. The main control board 300 controls the normal state and an ART state different from the normal state. When the number of remaining games in the ART state exceeds the number of remaining games in the special period, when the special replay is established, the operation order in which the symbol combination related to the fourth RT transition replay is displayed is notified, and the symbol combination is displayed. As a result, the state is shifted to the fourth RT gaming state. And when it is the 4th RT gaming state at the time of the end of the ART state which ended with the end of the special period, the special state is controlled and the transition lottery to a new special period is performed. [Selection] Figure 60

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  In addition, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and extracts the extracted random number value for each winning combination. The winning combination is determined based on the winning combination determination table in which the lottery value is defined, and reel stop control is performed based on the determined winning combination and the stop button operation by the player. Here, depending on the determined winning combination, it may be permitted to display a plurality of symbol combinations on the active line among predetermined symbol combinations.

  At this time, when “losing” is determined as the winning combination, a combination of symbols that can receive a privilege is not displayed regardless of the operation of the stop button at any timing. In addition, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the winning combination will not be displayed on the active line in combination with the winning combination, or if the stop button is operated at any timing, There is a winning combination in which such a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined as a winning combination that does not stop and display the combination of symbols related to the winning combination unless the stop button is operated at the appropriate timing, the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing. Since it is necessary to do this, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”). ”) Is performed. Here, the “specific state” is a bonus game in which a probability that a combination of symbols from which medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as “a combination of symbols related to winning a prize”) is displayed on the active line is improved as compared to the normal state. (“RB (regular bonus)”, “BB (big bonus)”, “CB (challenge bonus)”, “MB (middle bonus)”, etc.) If the symbol combination is not displayed (or if the stop button is not operated in the appropriate order, the symbol combination related to the winning combination with the smaller number of medals will be displayed) In addition, “AT (assist time)” that informs the appropriate operation order of the stop button, etc., and operating the start lever without performing the medal insertion operation More re-game the player is started to improve the probability that is determined as a winning combination "RT (replay time)", AT and RT is activated at the same time there is a such as "ART (assisted replay time)". Therefore, the player plays a game while desiring to shift to a specific state advantageous to the player.

  Here, a gaming machine having an ART state that is an example of a specific state and an ART addition state in which the number of games in the ART state is added is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-195880

  By the way, in recent gaming machines, in order to suppress the increase in euphoria, the movement has been set so as to set an upper limit on the number of times the user can stay in an advantageous state such as ART. When the state is won, the number of times is counted as an advantageous game from the next game of the won game.

  In such a movement, even if the number of games in the above-described ART state is increased in the above-mentioned ART addition state, etc., the ART state can only be played up to the upper limit number of times in the above-mentioned advantageous game. There was a possibility of causing a decrease in the entertainment interest in the state.

  In view of such a situation, an object of the present invention is to prevent a possibility of causing a decrease in gaming interest in a specific state such as an ART state.

  In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on a peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the detecting means, and rotating the plurality of reels based on the detection of the starting operation by the start operation detecting means. Reel rotation control means for performing control, stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and capable of being stopped by a player, the stop operation means being stopped, and the winning combination On the basis of the winning combination determined by the determination unit, a stop control unit that performs control to stop the reel rotated by the reel rotation control unit, and a stop control unit As a result of all the reels being stopped, a determination means for determining a combination of symbols displayed on a predetermined active line, a first gaming state, and a first advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A gaming state control means for controlling a second gaming state and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and is different from the second gaming state; and the second gaming state When the winning combination determining means determines that a special winning combination is determined, and the determining means determines that a combination of symbols related to the special winning combination is displayed, the second game state to the third game Game state transition control means for controlling transition to a state, a normal period, and a special period that is different from the normal period and can be ended based on a game that has been performed in a predetermined period A period control means for controlling the state, a normal state, and a state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state, and that controls a specific state that can be ended when a predetermined end condition is satisfied When the predetermined termination condition in the specific state is not satisfied when the control means and the game for the predetermined period are performed in the special period, the special state is terminated at the end of the special period. End control means for ending the control, and when the specific condition is established in the specific state, the symbol related to the special winning combination based on the determination of the special winning combination by the winning combination determining means An operation order notifying means for notifying the operation order of the stop operation means according to the combination, and when the third gaming state is controlled when the specific state is finished, A state transition control means for performing transition control from a fixed state to a special state different from the specific state, and a transition lottery means for performing a lottery for transition to a new special period in the special state, To do.

  Here, the “start operation” may be any operation as long as the operation is performed by the player when the preparation operation for performing the start operation is performed. For example, operating a start lever may be applied, or operating a start button may be applied.

  The “plurality of reels” is not limited as long as it is composed of “2” or more. For example, it may be “2” reels, “3” reels, or “4” reels.

  In addition, the “first gaming state” is any gaming state as long as it is disadvantageous for the player as compared to the “second gaming state” described later and the “third gaming state” described later. Also good. Further, the advantage and disadvantage for the player is, for example, that the “first game state” has a lower replay win probability than the “second game state” described later and the “third game state” described later. Therefore, it may be positioned as a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

  The “second gaming state” is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the “first gaming state”, and any gaming state that is different from a “third gaming state” described later. It may be in a state.

  In addition, the “third gaming state” is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the “first gaming state”, and any gaming state that is different from the “second gaming state”. There may be.

  The “special winning combination” may be any winning combination as long as it is a predetermined winning combination. Further, the special winning combination may be a “1” winning combination or a plurality of winning combinations.

  The “normal period” may be any period as long as it is different from the “advantage period” described later. The state controlled in the “normal period” may be singular or plural.

  In addition, the “special period” is a period that is different from the normal period, and can be any period as long as it can be ended based on a game of a predetermined period. Good. The state controlled in the “special period” may be singular or plural. Further, there may be a plurality of termination conditions for the “special period”.

  Further, the “specific state” may be any state as long as it is more advantageous for the player than the normal state. For example, a bonus state or an ART state may be used. Further, the “specific state” may be singular or plural.

  The “predetermined end condition” may be any condition as long as it is a predetermined end condition. For example, an end condition may be that a predetermined number of games have been played, an end condition may be that a certain winning combination is won, and an end condition may be that a period managed by the main control board 300 is changed. Also good. Further, there may be a plurality of “specific state” termination conditions.

  The “specific condition” may be any condition as long as it is a predetermined condition. For example, it may be a specific condition that the period in which a game can be played in a specific state exceeds the period in which a game can be played in a special period, for example, that the period in which a game can be played in a specific state has reached a predetermined period Specific conditions may be used. Note that the period during which the game can be played may be managed by the number of games or may be managed by the difference number.

  The “special state” may be any state as long as it is different from the normal state and the specific state. In addition, the new special period that is the target of the transfer lottery in the special state may be any type. For example, it may be an ART state, a chance state, or a high probability state.

  Further, the “operation order notification means” may be anything as long as it can notify the player so that the operation order can be grasped. For example, the payout number display device 16, the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, the speaker 33, etc. can be applied, and these may be combined to constitute the operation order notification means.

  According to the present invention, in a specific state such as an ART state, it is possible to prevent a possibility of causing a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance perspective view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of an arrangement | sequence data table. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning combination, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a whole schematic diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of an advantageous period indicator. It is a figure which shows an example of the advantageous period transfer determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an ART related lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for high probability states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for chance states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for precursor states. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to the state at the time of a start in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal time bonus states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus states during ART in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for high probability states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for a precursor state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for chance states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the information setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the start time period management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to the state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal carrying over states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for a normal time bonus state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation state at the time of display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for carrying over states during display ART in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus state during ART at the time of display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display time period management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED display process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED data creation process for instruction information display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED data creation process for a period display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the process for normal states in the main control board which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the modification of the process for a precursor state in the main control board which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the process for normal states in the main control board which concerns on a 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the process according to the state at the time of a display in the main control board which concerns on a 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the process for a display time precursor state in the main control board which concerns on a 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the modification of the process for ART states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main control board communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of the winning combination in 2nd Embodiment, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART pull-back lottery table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st animation figure which shows the content of embodiment roughly. It is a 2nd animation figure which shows the content of embodiment roughly. It is a 3rd animation figure which shows the content of embodiment roughly. It is a 4th animation figure which shows the content of embodiment roughly. It is a 5th animation figure which shows the content of embodiment roughly. It is a 1st time chart figure which shows the content of embodiment roughly. It is a 2nd time chart figure which shows the content of embodiment roughly. It is a 3rd time chart figure which shows the content of embodiment roughly. It is a conceptual diagram of 2nd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
The first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the gaming machine.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. A plurality of components are attached to the cabinet 2.

(Front door 3)
The front door 3 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 2. A plurality of components are attached to the front door 3. Although not shown, a hinge mechanism is provided on the left side of the cabinet 2 when viewed from the front, and supports the front door 3 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 5)
The keyhole 5 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of a game store performs a maintenance operation or a change of a set value indicating a degree advantageous for the player, unlocking of a locking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is performed. Done. Specifically, the door is unlocked by inserting a door key (not shown) into the keyhole 5 and rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Then, the front door 3 is opened, and maintenance work and work such as setting value change are performed. In addition, when the maintenance work and the work such as the change of the set value are finished, the front door 3 is closed and the door is locked.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the upper left side of the keyhole 5 when viewed from the front, and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(BET button 7)
The BET button 7 is provided on the left side of the MAXBET button 8 to be described later, and is provided to use “1” medals among the stored medals for the game.

(MAXBET button 8)
The MAXBET button 8 is provided on the right side of the BET button 7 and is provided to use the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game (“1” game) among the stored (credit) medals. ing. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”. Note that the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game may be arbitrarily changed.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided in the back of the BET button 7 (in the Z-axis direction), and is provided to settle a medal stored (credited) among medals acquired by the player. That is, when there is a medal stored (credited) and the settlement button 9 is operated, the medal is paid out to a tray unit 24 described later. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be stored (credited) is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided on the lower left side of the MAXBET button 8. The start lever 10 is provided for the player to perform a start operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 (to be described later) acquires a random number value and determines the winning combination, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right to be described later. A process for starting the rotation of the reel 20 is performed.

(Left stop button 11)
The left stop button 11 is provided on the right side of the start lever 10 in front view. The left stop button 11 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping rotation of the left reel 18 described later.

(Intermediate stop button 12)
The middle stop button 12 is provided on the right side of the left stop button 11 when viewed from the front. Further, the middle stop button 12 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping the rotation of the middle reel 19 described later.

(Right stop button 13)
The right stop button 13 is provided on the right side of the middle stop button 12 when viewed from the front. The right stop button 13 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping the rotation of the right reel 20 described later.

(Selector 14)
The selector 14 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 (not shown in FIG. 1). The selector 14 is provided to determine whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate.

(Storage number indicator 15)
The stored number indicator 15 is provided at the upper right of the settlement button 9. The stored number display 15 is provided to display the number of stored medal (credit) of the player stored (credited) in the gaming machine 1. Here, in the present embodiment, the stored number indicator 15 is configured by a “7-segment LED (seven segment display)”.

(Payout number display 16)
The payout number display 16 is provided on the right side of the stored number display 15 and is constituted by a “7 segment LED (seven segment display)”. The payout number display 16 displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player, or displays that the game machine 1 is in an error state when the game machine 1 is in an error state. Is provided. Further, in the payout number display unit 16, the “push order replay A”, “push order replay B”, “push order” described later, depending on the state managed by the main control board 300 (details of the state will be described later). “Replay C”, “Push Order Replay D”, “Push Order Replay E”, “First Push Order Bell”, “Second Push Order Bell”, “Third Push Order Bell”, “Fourth Push Order Bell”, With respect to “5th push order bell”, a part or all of the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is displayed. For example, in the “ART state” described later, when “first push order bell” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right from the timing when the start lever 10 is operated. The operation sequence (“12”) indicating that the left stop button 11 is operated first and the middle stop button 12 is operated next at an arbitrary timing until the operation reception of the stop button 13 becomes valid. It is displayed on the payout number display 16. The operation order “1” displayed on the payout number display 16 indicates the left stop button 11, the operation order “2” indicates the middle stop button 12, and the operation order “3”. "Represents the right stop button 13. That is, when “12” is displayed on the payout number display 16, the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and “23” is displayed on the payout number display 16. Sometimes, the middle stop button 12 is operated first, the right stop button 13 is operated next, and when "31" is displayed on the payout number display 16, the right stop button 13 is operated first, and the left stop button 11 is operated next, for example, when the ART state is controlled, a combination of symbols related to “correct answer bell” can be displayed, and “9” payouts can be received. In the following description, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 may be referred to as “operation order”. Further, “first push order bell”, “second push order bell”, “third push order bell”, “fourth push order bell”, and “fifth push order bell” described later are simply “push order bell”. May be described. Also, “push order replay A”, “push order replay B”, “push order replay C”, “push order replay D”, and “push order replay E”, which will be described later, may be simply referred to as “push order replay”. is there. Further, “Push Order Replay A”, “Push Order Replay B”, “Push Order Replay C”, “Push Order Replay D”, “Push Order Replay E”, “First Push Order Bell”, “Second” The “push order bell”, “third push order bell”, “fourth push order bell”, and “fifth push order bell” may be simply referred to as “batting order”. Note that a part or all of the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 is displayed on the payout number display 16. A part or all of the operation order of the stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 may be displayed. For example, a dedicated display device may be newly provided.

  Further, in the payout number display 16, when the period managed by the main control board 300 (details of the period will be described later) is an “advantageous period” advantageous to the player, the segment 16 a of the payout number display 16 is displayed. Turns on and becomes a “waiting period” that can be shifted when the period managed by the main control board 300 is in a “normal period” that is disadvantageous to the player or when it is determined to shift to the “advantageous period” In some cases, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is turned off. Thereby, the administrator of the gaming machine or the player can determine whether or not the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantageous period”. Details of lighting timing and the like will be described later. Note that a dedicated display device different from the payout number display device 16 may be newly provided and turned on or off.

(Door open / close sensor 17s)
The door opening / closing sensor 17s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided for detecting whether or not the front door 3 is open (not shown in FIG. 1). The door opening / closing sensor 17s includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. When a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening / closing sensor 17s is locked. The part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. Thereby, the door open / close sensor 17s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Left reel 18)
The left reel 18 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure (not shown in FIG. 1). Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 18, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The left reel 18 is rotationally driven by a left stepping motor 151 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Middle reel 19)
The middle reel 19 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure (not shown in FIG. 1). Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the middle reel 19, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The middle reel 19 is driven to rotate by a middle stepping motor 152, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Right reel 20)
The right reel 20 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure (not shown in FIG. 1). In addition, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the right reel 20, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The right reel 20 is rotationally driven by a right stepping motor 153, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Direction button 21)
The effect button 21 is provided on the right side of the MAXBET button 8 and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. Here, the sub control board 400 described later performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 31 described later via the effect control board 500 described later when the operation of the effect button 21 is detected.

(Cross key 22)
The cross key 22 is provided on the right side of the effect button 21 and includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. ing. Then, the sub control board 400 described later performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like described later via the effect control board 500 described later when the operation of the cross key 22 is detected.

(Display window 23)
The display window 23 is provided on the front side of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, and a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 can be visually recognized. Is provided to do. Specifically, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the left reel 18, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the middle reel 19, and drawn on the peripheral surface of the right reel 20. A total of “9” symbols of “3” symbols can be viewed through the display window 23. In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the visual recognition of the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the symbols displayed on the display window 23 are irradiated by emitting a backlight (not shown). .

(Effective line)
The effective line is formed as a line connecting the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 with straight lines among the symbols displayed on the display window 23. For example, an “upper line” in which the symbols displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbols displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the symbols displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 20 are connected by a straight line, The “middle line” that connects the symbols displayed in the middle stage of 18, the symbols displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the symbols displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 20, or the lower stage of the left reel 18. A “lower line” that connects the displayed symbol, the symbol displayed in the lower part of the middle reel 19, and the symbol displayed in the lower part of the right reel 20, or the symbol displayed in the upper part of the left reel 18. A “downward right line” connecting the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 19 and the symbol displayed in the lower stage of the right reel 20, a symbol displayed in the lower stage of the left reel 18, The symbol displayed in the middle of reel 19 and the right Connecting the symbols displayed in the upper Lumpur 20 in a straight line such as "upward-sloping line", and the like. In addition to this, a “first symbol” formed by the symbols displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbols displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the symbols displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 20. The “second irregular line” formed by the “anomaly line”, the symbol displayed in the lower part of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle part of the middle reel 19, and the symbol displayed in the lower part of the right reel 20. Or the like. In the present embodiment, any one of these effective lines may be set as the effective line, or a plurality may be set as the effective lines.

(Tray unit 24)
The saucer unit 24 is provided below the front face of the front door 3. Further, the tray unit 24 is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout opening 25 described later.

(Medal payout exit 25)
The medal payout opening 25 is provided below the front door 3 and is provided for discharging a medal paid out by a hopper 202 described later when the medal payout is performed. The medal payout port 25 is inserted when the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal by the selector sensor 14s or when the medal insertion cannot be accepted. It is provided for discharging the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 when a medal is inserted into the slot 6.

(First BET lamp 26)
The first BET lamp 26 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front of the stored number indicator 15 and is provided to notify that the player has bet “1” medals.

(Second BET lamp 27)
The second BET lamp 27 is provided above the first BET lamp 26 and is provided to notify that “2” medals have been betted by the player.

(3rd BET lamp 28)
The third BET lamp 28 is provided above the second BET lamp 27 and is provided to notify that the player has bet “3” medals.

(Liquid crystal display device 31)
The liquid crystal display device 31 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for displaying moving images, still images, and the like. Here, the sub-control board 400 to be described later has the following “push order replay A”, “push order replay B”, “push” according to the state managed by the main control board 300 (details of the state will be described later). “Order Replay C”, “Push Order Replay D”, “Push Order Replay E”, “First Push Order Bell”, “Second Push Order Bell”, “Third Push Order Bell”, “Fourth Push Order Bell” For the “fifth push order bell”, the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 via an effect control board 500 described later. For example, when the “first push order bell” is won, the operation order indicating that the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the right stop button 13 is operated last. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31.

(LED32)
The LED 32 is provided on the peripheral edge of the front surface of the front door 3 and is designed and designed with a shape, color, pattern, pattern, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs an effect of visually appealing to the player by performing a process of turning on and blinking the LED 32.

(Speaker 33)
The speaker 33 is provided below the back side of the front door 3 (not shown in FIG. 1), and is provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs a process of outputting sound from the speaker 33, thereby performing an effect appealing to the player.

(Status board 100)
The status board 100 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and below the display window 23 (not shown in FIG. 1). The status board 100 also includes a BET switch 7sw described later, a MAXBET switch 8sw described later, a settlement switch 9sw described later, a start switch 10sw described later, a left stop switch 11sw described later, a middle stop switch 12sw described later, and a right stop described later. A switch 13sw, a selector sensor 14s described later, a stored number display 15, a payout number display 16, a door open / close sensor 17s, and a main control board 300 described later are connected.

(Reel control board 150)
The reel control board 150 is provided above the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 (not shown in FIG. 1), and rotates and stops the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20. Provided to control. The reel control board 150 includes a left stepping motor 151 to be described later, a middle stepping motor 152 to be described later, a right stepping motor 153 to be described later, a left reel sensor 154s to be described later, a middle reel sensor 155s to be described later, and a right reel sensor 156s to be described later. And a main control board 300 to be described later are connected.

(Power supply board 200)
The power supply board 200 is provided inside the cabinet 2 on the left side when viewed from the front (not shown in FIG. 1), and is provided for performing control for supplying power to the gaming machine 1. The power supply board 200 is connected to a power switch 201sw described later, a hopper 202 described later, a main control board 300, and a sub control board 400 described later.

(Power button 201)
The power button 201 is provided on the left side of the hopper 202, which will be described later (not shown in FIG. 1), and is provided for performing an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 202)
The hopper 202 is provided on the right side of the power supply board 200 as viewed from the front, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 when a combination of symbols for paying out medals is displayed on the active line, and gives a medal to the player. Process to pay out.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 (not shown in FIG. 1), and controls the gaming machine 1. Is provided. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301 described later, a main ROM 302 described later, a main RAM 303 described later, and a main random number generator 304 described later. Further, the external control terminal board 30, the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400, which will be described later, are connected to the main control board 300.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is provided below the main control board 300, and is provided mainly for effect control (not shown in FIG. 1). The sub control board 400 includes a sub CPU 401 described later, a sub ROM 402 described later, a sub RAM 403 described later, and a sub random number generator 404 described later. Furthermore, a later-described effect button sensor 21s, a later-described cross key sensor 22s, a power supply board 200, a main control board 300, and a later-described effect control board 500 are connected to the sub control board 400. The sub control board 400 is connected so that information (commands, etc.) is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 only in one direction.

(Production control board 500)
The effect control board 500 is provided above the back surface of the front door 3 (not shown in FIG. 1), and is provided mainly for executing effects. The effect control board 500 includes an effect control CPU 501 described later, an effect control ROM 502 described later, an effect control RAM 503 described later, a CGROM 504 described later, a sound source IC 505 described later, a sound source ROM 506 described later, and a VDP 507 described later. Further, the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, the speaker 33, and the sub control board 400 are connected to the effect control board 500.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power supply board 200, and a sub control board 400 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(BET switch 7sw)
The BET switch 7sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the BET button 7. Here, the status board 100 transmits a BET switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the BET button 7 is detected by the BET switch 7sw. Then, the main control board 300 receives “1” from the stored (credit) medal based on the reception of the BET switch input signal from the status board 100 when the medal insertion into the gaming machine is permitted. The process of using “medals” is performed.

(MAXBET switch 8sw)
The MAXBET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Here, the status board 100 transmits a MAXBET switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw. Then, based on the reception of the MAXBET switch input signal from the status board 100, the main control board 300 performs a process of using “3” medals from the stored medals.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9. Here, the status board 100 transmits a settlement switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected by the settlement switch 9sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of adjusting the stored medals based on the reception of the adjustment switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10. Here, the status board 100 transmits a start switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The main control board 300 performs processing for starting rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the reception of the start switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11. Here, the status board 100 transmits a left stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating left reel 18 based on the reception of the left stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12. Here, the status board 100 transmits an intermediate stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the intermediate stop button 12 is detected by the intermediate stop switch 12sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating middle reel 19 based on the reception of the middle stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13. Here, the status board 100 transmits a right stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs processing for stopping the rotating right reel 20 based on the reception of the right stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Selector sensor 14s)
The selector sensor 14 s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Here, the status board 100 transmits a selector sensor input signal to the main control board 300 when an appropriate medal passage is detected by the selector sensor 14s. Then, the main control board 300 receives the selector sensor input signal from the status board 100, and adds “1” to the number of medals to be stored (credited) or the number of medals used in the game. A process of adding “1” is performed.

(Left stepping motor 151)
The left stepping motor 151 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is provided for controlling the left reel 18. The left stepping motor 151 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the left reel 18 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the left reel 18 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151 after a reel index is detected by a left reel sensor 154s described later. .

(Medium stepping motor 152)
The middle stepping motor 152 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is provided for controlling the middle reel 19. Further, the middle stepping motor 152 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation axis at a specified angle. As a result, the intermediate reel 19 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the intermediate stepping motor 152. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the middle reel 19 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152 after the reel index is detected by the middle reel sensor 155s described later. .

(Right stepping motor 153)
The right stepping motor 153 is provided inside the right reel 20 and is provided for controlling the right reel 20. The right stepping motor 153 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the right reel 20 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the right reel 20 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153 after a reel index is detected by a right reel sensor 156s described later. .

(Left reel sensor 154s)
The left reel sensor 154s is provided inside the left reel 18, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The left reel sensor 154s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the left reel 18 has rotated “1”.

(Medium reel sensor 155s)
The middle reel sensor 155s is provided inside the middle reel 19, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The middle reel sensor 155s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the middle reel 19 has rotated “1”.

(Right reel sensor 156s)
The right reel sensor 156s is provided inside the right reel 20, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The right reel sensor 156s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the right reel 20 has rotated “1”.

(Power switch 201sw)
The power switch 201sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the power button 201. Here, the power supply board 200 performs a process of supplying power to the gaming machine 1 when the operation of the power button 201 is detected by the power switch 201sw.

(Hopper sensor 202s)
The hopper sensor 202s is a sensor for detecting that a medal to be paid out by driving the hopper 202 has passed. Here, the power supply board 200 transmits a hopper sensor input signal to the main control board 300 when the hopper sensor 202s detects the payout of medals. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of subtracting the payout number based on the reception of the hopper sensor input signal from the status board 100.

(Monitor display unit 29)
The monitor display unit 29 is made up of 7-segment LEDs of “4” digits, and is provided on the main control board 300. In addition, the monitor display unit 29 displays an advantageous period ratio in the cumulative game, a continuous action ratio between the “6000” games, a bonus ratio between the “6000” games, a continuous action ratio in the cumulative game, and a cumulative action ratio in the cumulative game. It is provided to display the ratio of bonuses.

(Advantageous period ratio in cumulative games)
Here, in this embodiment, the “advantageous period ratio in the accumulated game” is a value obtained by dividing the number of games played in the advantageous period described later by the accumulated number of games. When the main control board 300 performs control to display the advantageous period ratio in the accumulated game on the monitor display unit 29, the main control board 300 displays the advantageous period ratio in the accumulated game in the lower “2” digits of the monitor display unit 29. In addition, an identifier indicating that the advantageous period ratio in the accumulated game is displayed is displayed in the upper “2” digits of the monitor display unit 29.

(Consecutive action ratio of “6000” games)
Further, in the present embodiment, the accessory continuous operation ratio between “6000” games is a value obtained by dividing the number of times the accessory continuous operation device is operated by “6000”. When the main control board 300 performs control to display the accessory continuous operation ratio between “6000” games on the monitor display unit 29, the main control board 300 displays the accessory continuous operation ratio between “6000” games to the monitor display unit 29. Control to display the identifier in the upper “2” digit of the monitor display unit 29 while performing control to display in the lower “2” digit of the “6000” game. Do.

(Percentage of items between “6000” games)
Further, in the present embodiment, the “ratio of bonuses between the“ 6000 ”games is a value obtained by dividing the number of times the bonuses are actuated by“ 6000 ”. When the main control board 300 performs control to display the bonus rate between “6000” games on the monitor display unit 29, the main control board 300 sets the bonus rate between “6000” games to the lower “2” of the monitor display unit 29. Control to display in the “digit”, and control to display the identifier indicating that the ratio of the actors between the “6000” games is displayed in the upper “2” digit of the monitor display unit 29.

(Consecutive action ratio of items in cumulative games)
Further, in the present embodiment, the accessory continuous operation ratio in the cumulative game is a value obtained by dividing the number of times the accessory continuous operation device is operated by the cumulative number of games. When the main control board 300 performs control to display the continuous action ratio of the accumulated games in the monitor display unit 29, the main control board 300 displays the consecutive action ratio of the accumulated games in the lower “2” digit of the monitor display section 29. And an identifier indicating that an accessory continuous action ratio in the cumulative game is displayed is displayed in the upper “2” digit of the monitor display unit 29.

(Composition ratio in accumulated games)
Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the bonus item in the cumulative game is a value obtained by dividing the number of times the bonus character is actuated by the cumulative game number. When the main control board 300 performs the control to display the bonus item in the cumulative game on the monitor display unit 29, the main control board 300 performs the control to display the bonus rate in the cumulative game in the lower “2” digit of the monitor display unit 29. At the same time, control is performed to display an identifier indicating that the ratio of the feature in the accumulated game is displayed in the upper “2” digits of the monitor display unit 29.

(External concentration terminal board 30)
The external concentrated terminal board 30 is managed by the main control board 300, a medal insertion signal that can specify the number of medals used in the game, a medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, Is an ART signal that can specify that the state has shifted to the “ART state” described later, and a bonus that can specify that the state has shifted to the “bonus state” of either “normal bonus state” or “bonus state during ART” described later It is provided to transmit a status signal and a security signal that can specify that an illegal act has been performed to the outside of the gaming machine 1 such as a hall computer (not shown).

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in a main ROM 302, which will be described later, and performs a predetermined arithmetic process in accordance with the progress of the game, so that the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power board 200, and the sub control board. A predetermined signal is transmitted to 400. The main CPU 301 has a built-in register.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 is provided on the main control board 300. The main ROM 302 is provided for storing a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 has an arrangement data table (see FIG. 3) that defines the arrangement of symbols to be described later, and a symbol that defines combinations of symbols to be described later, in each of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. When determining whether to shift to a combination table (see FIG. 4), a winning combination determination table (see FIG. 6) to be referred to when determining a winning combination for each gaming state described later, or an “advantage period” described later. Advantageous period transition determination table to be referred to (see FIG. 9), ART related lottery table to be referred to when a lottery related to the ART state described later (see FIG. 10) is referred, and referred to when a lottery is performed in a high probability state described later. High probability state lottery table (see FIG. 11), chance state lottery table (see FIG. 12) to be referred to when performing lottery in a chance state described later, For aura state lottery table referenced when determining the number of games in trillion states stores (see FIG. 13) or the like.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided on the main control board 300. The main RAM 303 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 is provided with various counters such as a later-described input number counter and various storage areas such as a setting value storage area described later.

(Main random number generator 304)
The main random number generator 304 is provided on the main control board 300. The main random number generator 304 is provided for generating a random value used in a lottery or the like for determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main random number generator 304 generates a random number value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Production button sensor 21s)
The effect button sensor 21 s is connected to the effect button 21 and is provided to detect an operation of the effect button 21. Here, the effect button sensor 21 s transmits an effect button sensor input signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 21. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the effect button 21 is operated based on the reception of the effect button sensor input signal.

(Cross key sensor 22s)
The cross key sensor 22 s is connected to the cross key 22 and is provided to detect an operation of the cross key 22. Here, the cross key sensor 22 s transmits a cross key sensor input signal to the sub-control board 400 based on detecting the operation of the cross key 22. Then, the sub-control board 400 performs processing when the cross key 22 is operated based on the reception of the cross key sensor input signal.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is provided on the sub control board 400. Further, the sub CPU 401 reads a program stored in a sub ROM 402, which will be described later, and performs predetermined processing based on command information received from the main control board 300 and signals input from the effect button sensor 21s and the cross key sensor 22s. It is provided for performing calculations and supplying the results of the calculations to the effect control board 500 and the like. Note that the sub CPU 401 has a built-in register.

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub ROM 402 is provided for storing a control program executed by the sub CPU 401, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the sub ROM 402 stores an effect determination table (not shown) or the like that is referred to when determining the effect. In addition, the effect performed in the liquid crystal display device 31 etc. is determined based on this effect determination table.

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub RAM 403 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub RAM 403 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the sub CPU 401.

(Sub-random number generator 404)
The sub random number generator 404 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub-random number generator 404 is provided for generating a random value used in a lottery or the like for determining the production. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub-random number generator 404 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Production control CPU 501)
The effect control CPU 501 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control CPU 501 is provided to read a program stored in an effect control ROM 502 (to be described later) and create a display list based on a signal received from the sub control board 400. The effect control CPU 501 performs control for causing the liquid crystal display device 31 to display image data stored in a CGROM 504 described later.

(Production control ROM 502)
The effect control ROM 502 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control ROM 502 is provided for storing a control program executed by the effect control CPU 501, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the effect control ROM 502 is a program for control processing of the effect control CPU 501, a display list generation program for generating a display list, a combination of animation scenes that are referred to when displaying animations, and a display order of animation scenes. A weight frame indicating an image display time, various target data such as a sprite identification number and a transfer source address, various parameters such as a sprite display position and a transfer destination address, a drawing method, and the like are stored.

(Production control RAM 503)
The effect control RAM 503 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control RAM 503 functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the effect control CPU 501, and is provided for temporarily storing data read from the effect control ROM 502.

(CGROM504)
The CGROM 504 is provided on the effect control board 500. The CGROM 504 includes color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, “32” pixels × “32” pixels), and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. It is provided for compressing and storing image data comprising a set.

(Sound source IC505)
The sound source IC 505 is provided on the effect control board 500. The sound source IC 505 is provided for reading a program and data relating to sound stored in a sound source ROM 506, which will be described later, and generating a sound signal for driving the speaker 33.

(Sound source ROM 506)
The sound source ROM 506 is provided on the effect control board 500. Further, the sound source ROM 506 is provided for storing a program, data, and the like related to a sound output when an effect is executed.

(VDP507)
The VDP 507 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 501. Then, control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 31 is performed by generating a video signal (for example, LVDS signal or RGB signal) based on the read image data. The VDP 507 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus interface, a CPU interface, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus.

(Array data table)
Next, the array data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The arrangement data table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the symbol position of the symbol displayed in the middle of the display window 23 when the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, and the right reel sensor 156s detect the reel index. Is defined as “00”. Also, symbol positions “00” to “20” are defined based on the symbol position “00”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the array data table includes “a symbol related to black seven”, “a symbol related to red seven”, “a symbol related to white seven”, “a symbol related to BAR”, “ "Cherry design", "Watermelon design", "Replay design", "First Bell design", "Second Bell design", and "3rd Bell design" "Design" is arranged.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to draw from the symbol position at the timing when the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw detect the stop operation by the player to the symbol ahead of “4” frames. For example, when the symbol position “11” of the left reel 18 passes the middle line and the left stop switch 11sw detects a stop operation by the player, the symbol position “07” ahead of “4” frames. Can be drawn to the middle line (designs of symbols “11”, “10”, “09”, “08”, “07”) up to “Black Seven” .

(Design combination table)
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and defines the symbol combination name, symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player.

  Here, when the symbol combination displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the medal payout, the replay (replay) operation, the bonus operation, Control for giving a privilege such as transition of the gaming state is performed. If the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, the result is “out of line”.

  In the symbol combination table, symbol combination names “Red Seven BB”, “White Seven BB”, “Black Seven BB”, “First Normal Replay”, “Second Normal Replay”, “ “3rd normal replay”, “4th normal replay”, “transition replay”, “failure bell”, “first correct answer bell”, “second correct answer bell”, and “third correct answer bell” , “Watermelon”, “first cherry”, “second cherry”, “third cherry”, “fourth cherry”, “fifth cherry”, “first special role”, “ “Second special role”, “first blank”, “second blank”, “third blank”, “fourth blank”, “fifth blank”, and “sixth blank” It is prescribed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “a combination of symbols related to one type BB” (any one of “Red Seven BB”, “White Seven BB”, and “Black Seven BB”) is displayed on the active line. , BB (an accessory continuous operation device relating to the first type special accessory) is operated. In the present embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to one type BB” may be referred to as “the combination of symbols related to BB” and “the combination of symbols related to bonus”. In addition, “red seven BB”, “white seven BB”, and “black seven BB” may be collectively referred to simply as “BB” or “bonus”.

  In the present embodiment, any combination of symbols of “first normal replay”, “second normal replay”, “third normal replay”, “fourth normal replay”, and “transition replay” is an effective line. When displayed above, the replay is activated. When the re-game operation is performed, a game in the next game can be performed without inserting medals. “First normal replay”, “second normal replay”, “third normal replay”, “fourth normal replay”, and “transition replay” are collectively referred to simply as “replay” or “replay”. Sometimes.

  In the present embodiment, “failure bell”, “first correct answer bell”, “second correct answer bell”, “third correct answer bell”, “watermelon”, “first cherry”, “second cherry”, When a combination of symbols of “third cherry”, “fourth cherry”, “fifth cherry”, “first special combination”, and “second special combination” is displayed on the active line, Is paid out. These symbol combinations are collectively referred to as “a symbol combination related to winning a prize”.

  In the present embodiment, “failure bell”, “first correct answer bell”, “second correct answer bell”, and “third correct answer bell” are sometimes collectively referred to as “bell”. The “bell”, “second correct answer bell”, and “third correct answer bell” may be collectively referred to simply as “correct answer bell”. In addition, “first cherry”, “second cherry”, “third cherry”, “fourth cherry”, and “fifth cherry” may be collectively referred to simply as “cherry”. Further, the “first special role” and the “second special role” may be collectively referred to simply as “special role”.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of any of the symbols “first blank”, “second blank”, “third blank”, “fourth blank”, “fifth blank”, and “sixth blank” When displayed on the active line, medals are not paid out.

(Relationship between winning role, stop button operation order, winnings, etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 5, the relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described. In FIG. 5, a portion indicated by “◯” indicates that the winning combination is won, and a portion indicated by “−” indicates that the winning combination is not won.

  In FIG. 5, the effective line depends on the winning number corresponding to the winning combination, the content, whether or not each game state can be determined as the winning combination, and the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13. The relationship with the combination of symbols that can be displayed above is shown. Although not shown in FIG. 5, the condition devices that are activated differ depending on the determined winning combination, and one condition device is defined for one winning number. In some cases, a plurality of condition devices operate for one winning number. For example, if the winning number is “02” “push order replay A”, the condition device related to “transition replay” and the condition device related to “normal replay” are activated. Accordingly, it is possible to allow the display of the symbol combination related to “Migration Replay” and allow the display of the symbol combination related to “Normal Replay” depending on the operation order.

  In this embodiment, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at the same symbol position, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Depending on the order, winning combinations with different combinations of symbols on the active line are provided. For example, when the “first push order bell” of the winning number “12” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the left stop button 11 is operated first, and the middle stop button 12 is operated next. When the right stop button 13 is operated last, a combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when operating in the other operation order, the symbol combination related to “failed bell” is displayed according to the symbol position where the stop operation is performed, or the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed. Sometimes.

  In addition, a winning combination is provided in which the combination of symbols arranged on the effective line does not differ regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. For example, when “Red Seven BB” with a winning number “17” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are arranged in any order. Even when the operation is performed, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at a timing at which “a combination of symbols related to red BB” can be displayed on the effective line, “red seven The “combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line. However, if the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not detected at a timing at which “the combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” can be displayed on the active line, the “red seven BB” The “combination of symbols related to BB” cannot be displayed on the active line. However, once “Red Seven BB” is won, it can be carried over until “Combination of Symbols Related to Red Seven BB” is displayed on the active line. For example, in a game won for “Red Seven BB”, even if the “combination of symbols related to Red Seven BB” could not be displayed on the active line, after the next game, "Combination of symbols" can be displayed on the active line. Similarly, “White Seven BB” and “Black Seven BB” are also winning combinations that can be carried over.

  Further, when the “watermelon” with the winning number “08” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the left stop button 11 is displayed at a timing at which “the combination of symbols related to watermelon” can be displayed on the active line. When the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 are operated, the “combination of watermelon symbols” can be displayed on the active line.

  In addition, when “weak cherry” with a winning number “09” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button at a timing at which “cherry” can be displayed on the active line. 12. If the right stop button 13 is operated, “a combination of symbols related to cherry” can be displayed on the effective line. Here, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the winning combination and the gaming state in which the winning combination can be won is not limited to FIG. 5 and may be configured in any manner. For example, the winning combination that can be won in each gaming state can be arbitrarily changed. In the following description, “watermelon” with winning number “08”, “weak cherry” with winning number “09”, “strong cherry” with winning number “10”, and “chance role” with winning number “11”. Collectively, it may be described simply as “special small role”.

(Winning role determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and each of the “first RT gaming state”, “second RT gaming state”, “third RT gaming state”, and “RB gaming state” controlled by the main control board 300 is stored. The lottery value in is defined. The winning combination determination table exemplifies the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. The lottery value when the setting value is “2”, Illustration of a lottery value when the set value is “3”, a lottery value when the set value is “4”, and a lottery value when the set value is “5” is omitted. In this embodiment, the winning number “19” “Black Seven BB” has a difference between the lottery value when the set value is “1” and the lottery value when the set value is “6”. It is a winning role. On the other hand, the winning number “01” to the winning number “18” and the winning number “20” to the winning number “31” are the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery when the setting value is “6”. The winning role has no difference in value. The winning number “19” “Black Seven BB” has a lottery value “2” when the set value is “1” and a lottery value “8” when the set value is “6”. Therefore, when the set value is “6”, it is easier for the player to win “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19”, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, although the lottery values of the setting value “2” to the setting value “5” are not illustrated, they may be increased stepwise from the setting value “1”. For example, when the set value is “1”, the lottery value is “2”, when the set value is “2”, the lottery value is “3”, and when the set value is “3”, the lottery value is “4”. ”, When the set value is“ 4 ”, the lottery value is“ 5 ”, when the set value is“ 5 ”, the lottery value is“ 6 ”, and when the set value is“ 6 ”, the lottery value is“ 6 ”. 8 ". Further, for example, the lottery value between the setting value “1” and the setting value “3” may be “2”, and the lottery value between the setting value “4” and the setting value “6” may be “8”.

  In the “first RT gaming state”, lottery values are defined so that all winning combinations from the winning numbers “01” to “31” can be won. In the “second RT gaming state”, the “normal replay” with the winning number “01”, the “common bell” with the winning number “07”, the “watermelon” with the winning number “08”, and the winning number “09”. "Weak cherry", winning number "10" "strong cherry", winning number "11" "chance role", winning number "12" "first push order bell" and winning number " 13 ”“ second push order bell ”, winning number“ 14 ”“ third push order bell ”, winning number“ 15 ”“ fourth pushing order bell ”, and winning number“ 16 ”“ second ” “5 push order bell”, “red seven BB” with winning number “17”, “white seven BB” with winning number “18”, “black seven BB” with winning number “19”, and winning number “20” "Watermelon + Red Seven BB" and winning number "21" "Weak Cherry + Red Seven BB" and winning number "22" "strong cherry + red seven BB", winning number "23" "chance role + red seven BB", winning number "24" "watermelon + white seven BB" and winning number "25" “Weak cherry + white seven BB”, winning number “26” “strong cherry + white seven BB”, winning number “27” “chance role + white seven BB” and winning number “28” “ "Watermelon + Black Seven BB", "Weak Cherry + Black Seven BB" with winning number "29", "Strong Cherry + Black Seven BB" with winning number "30", "Chance role +" with winning number "31" A lottery value is defined for “Black Seven BB”. In the “third RT gaming state”, the “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, the “common bell” of the winning number “07”, the “watermelon” of the winning number “08”, and the winning number “09” "Weak cherry", winning number "10" "strong cherry", winning number "11" "chance role", winning number "12" "first push order bell" and winning number " 13 ”“ second push order bell ”, winning number“ 14 ”“ third push order bell ”, winning number“ 15 ”“ fourth pushing order bell ”, and winning number“ 16 ”“ second ” The lottery value is defined as “5 push order bell”. In the “RB gaming state”, the “common bell” with the winning number “07”, the “watermelon” with the winning number “08”, the “weak cherry” with the winning number “09”, and the winning number “10”. Lottery values are defined for “strong cherry” and “chance combination” of winning number “11”. In the “second RT gaming state”, “third RT gaming state”, and “RB gaming state”, the winning combination with the lottery value “0” is not won. Here, in the “RB gaming state”, in addition to the “common bell” of the winning number “07” or in place of the “common bell” of the winning number “07”, the “first push order” of the winning number “12” "Bell", winning number "13" "second push order bell", winning number "14" "third push order bell", winning number "15" "fourth push order bell", winning A lottery value may be assigned to the “5th push order bell” of the number “16”.

  Here, the “first RT gaming state” is a gaming state in which the user can stay when in a “normal state”, “predictor state”, “high probability state”, “ART ready state”, or “chance state”, which will be described later. The “second RT gaming state” is a gaming state in which the user can stay while in the “ART state” described later, and the “third RT gaming state” is in the “normal carryover state” and “ART carryover state” described later. The “RB gaming state” is a gaming state in which the player can stay in a “normal bonus state” and “ART bonus state” described later. Note that the winning number “12” has a “first pushing order bell”, the winning number “13” has a “second pushing order bell”, the winning number “14” has a “third pushing order bell”, and the winning number “15”. The “fourth push order bell” and the “fifth push order bell” of the winning number “16” constitute the “winning combination for paying out the maximum payout number” in the present embodiment.

  It should be noted that a “push position combination” may be provided instead of or together with the “batting order combination”. Here, the “push position combination” means, for example, the “black seven” symbol of the symbol position “07” of the left reel shown in FIG. 3, the “bell” symbol of any of the middle reels shown in FIG. 3 is a combination of symbols composed of one of the “bell” symbols on the right reel shown in FIG. 3 (“Black Seven Press Position”), and the symbol position “17” on the left reel shown in FIG. A combination consisting of a combination of a “seven” symbol, a “bell” symbol of one of the middle reels shown in FIG. 3 and a “bell” symbol of one of the right reels shown in FIG. 3 (“white seven” It is assumed that the “push position combination”). And, for example, when “Black Seven Press Position” is selected in the “ART state” to be described later, in the left reel 18, a notification (push position) is made to stop the “Black Seven” symbol on the active line. In the case of winning the “White Seven Press Position”, by informing the left reel 18 to stop the “White Seven” symbol on the active line (notification of the press position) Each “push position combination” is configured to be able to stop on the active line.

(Overview overview)
Next, an overall schematic diagram in the present embodiment will be described based on FIG. FIG. 7 shows a state managed by the main control board 300, a state transition, and a relationship between the state and the period.

  First, each state will be described.

(Normal state)
The “normal state” is a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 described later, the “normal state” indicates that BB has been determined by an internal lottery process described later (excluding the winning number “19”), or a special small role This is a state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to an “advantageous period” to be described later based on the determination. In the “normal state”, when the lottery for the “advantage period” that is performed based on the determination of the BB is won, the state is changed from the “normal state” to the “normal carryover state” described later. Thus, the period is shifted from a “normal period” described later to a “standby period” described later. On the other hand, if the lottery to the “advantage period” performed based on the determination of BB is not won, the state is changed from the “normal state” to the “normal carryover state” described later, and the period is The “normal period” described later is maintained. In addition, in the “normal state”, if the winning lottery for the “advantage period” that is performed based on the determination of the special small role is won, the state is won after performing the next game or multiple games. Transition to the completed state. Specifically, when the “high probability state” described later is won, the “normal state” is shifted to the “high probability state” described later, and the “chance state” described later or the “ART ready state” described later is entered. When winning, the “normal state” is shifted to the “predictor state” described later. Along with these state transitions, the period is shifted from a “normal period” described later to an “advantageous period” described later. On the other hand, if the winning lottery for the “advantage period” that is performed based on the determination of the special small role is not won, the state remains “normal state” and the period remains “normal period”. To do. As described above, in the “normal state”, it is expected that BB is determined or a special small part is determined by an internal lottery process described later.

  In the “normal state”, when “batting order combination” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, as shown in an information setting process described later, as an instruction information command described later that is a command indicating an operation order, An “instruction information (none) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400, and a “condition apparatus (rounding) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 as a condition apparatus command described later, which is a command indicating a winning combination. Here, the “instruction information (none) command” is a command that does not define the operation order with respect to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and the “condition device (rounding) command”. Is a command called “push order replay” that does not specify which push order replay is performed, if it is “push order replay A” of winning number “02” to “push order replay E” of winning number “06”. If the winning number is “1st push order bell” of the winning number “12” to “5th push order bell” of the winning number “16”, the “push order bell” that does not specify which push order bell is specified Command. That is, in the “normal state”, even when “batting order combination” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, a command “push order replay” or “push order bell” is transmitted, and a command that does not define the operation order Therefore, the sub-control board 400 that has received these commands cannot identify which “push order replay” or “push order bell” has been won, and which operation order is the operation order. Therefore, the operation order of “batting order” is not notified. In the “normal state”, regarding the “batting order”, the “condition device (rounding) command” and the “instruction information (none) command” are transmitted together. Only the “command” may be transmitted. Further, the “condition device (rounding) command” may be transmitted by including information that does not define the operation order.

(Normal carryover state)
The “normal carryover state” is a state in which transition is made in the “normal state” when BB is determined by an internal lottery process described later. That is, this is a more advantageous state for the player than the “normal state” in terms of shifting to a “normal bonus state” described later. The “normal carryover state” is a state in which the user stays until the combination of symbols related to the determined BB is displayed on the active line. As described above, in the “normal carryover state”, when the lottery for the “advantage period” to be performed based on the determination of the BB is won, the state is “normal carryover state” and the period is When it becomes a “waiting period” to be described later and the lottery for the “advantageous period” performed based on the determination of BB is not won, the state is “normal carryover state” and the period is “ "Normal period" remains. Further, since the “normal carryover state” corresponds to the “third RT gaming state” shown in FIG. 6, the BB lottery is not performed. In addition, a special small role is won, but even if the special small role is won, a lottery related to an “advantage period” described later is not performed. For example, in the “normal carryover state”, when the period is the “normal period” described later, the lottery to the “advantageous period” described later is not performed based on the winning of the special small role. In the “state”, when the period is the “waiting period” described later, the lottery for shifting to the “ART state” described later is not performed based on the winning of the special small role. Then, in the “normal carryover state” that has been transitioned after the winning number “19” has been determined, when the combination of symbols related to Black Seven BB is displayed on the active line, the “normal carryover state” will be described later. In the “normal carry-over state” which is shifted to the “normal special BB state” and the BB of other winning numbers is determined, the combination of symbols related to the determined BB is displayed on the active line. In the event of a failure, the “normal carry-over state” is shifted to the “normal normal BB state” described later.

  In the “normal carry-over state”, as in the case of the “normal state” described above, when “batting order” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, as shown in the information setting process described later, An “instruction information (none) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 as an instruction information command to be described later, which is a command indicating the order, and a “condition device (rounding)” is transmitted as a condition device command to be described later which is a command indicating the winning combination Command "is transmitted to the sub-control board 400. Other specific configurations are the same as those described in the “normal state”, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

(Normal BB state at normal time)
The “normal normal BB state” is a state in which a transition is made when a combination of symbols related to the determined BB is displayed on the active line in the “normal carryover state”. Specifically, “normal BB state at normal time” includes “red seven BB” with winning number “17”, “white seven BB” with winning number “18”, “watermelon + red seven BB” with winning number “20”. ”, Winning number“ 21 ”“ weak cherry + red seven BB ”, winning number“ 22 ”“ strong cherry + red seven BB ”, winning number“ 23 ”“ chance role + red seven BB ”, winning number“ “Watermelon + White Seven BB” of “24”, “Weak Cherry + White Seven BB” of winning number “25”, “Strong Cherry + White Seven BB” of winning number “26”, “Chance role” of winning number “27” + White Seven BB ”,“ Watermelon + Black Seven BB ”with winning number“ 28 ”,“ Weak Cherry + Black Seven BB ”with winning number“ 29 ”,“ Strong Cherry + Black Seven BB ”with winning number“ 30 ”, Winning number “31” “chance role + black seven It won either B "is a state in which a combination of symbols relating to winning the BB is transferred to be displayed on the pay line. The “normal normal BB state” corresponds to the “RB gaming state” shown in FIG. 6. In the “RB gaming state”, the “common bell” of the winning number “07” and the winning number “08” “Watermelon”, winning number “09” “weak cherry”, winning number “10” “strong cherry”, winning number “11” “chance role” won, and there is no “losing” This is a more advantageous state for the player than the “normal state”. The “normal normal BB state” is “advantageous period” when “normal carryover state” is “standby period”, and “normal carryover state” is “normal period”. The “normal period”. If the “normal BB state” is an “advantageous period”, as shown in FIG. 10A to be described later, it is based on having won the special small role during the “normal BB state”. Then, a lottery for shifting to the “ART state” described later is performed, and as shown in FIG. 10B described later, a lottery for shifting to the “ART state” is already won during the “normal BB state at normal time”. Based on the fact that the special small role is won in the situation, the number of games in the “ART state” is added and a lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the “normal BB state” is “normal period”, even if the special small role is won during the “normal BB state”, the lottery to the “ART state” will not be selected. It has become. Therefore, even in the same “normal time normal BB state”, the player is more advantageous when the period is “advantageous period” than when the period is “normal period”. When the bonus termination condition is satisfied in the “normal normal BB state”, if the managed period is the “normal period”, the “normal normal BB state” is changed to the “normal state”. When the managed period is the “advantage period” and the transition to the “ART state” described later is determined, the transition is made from the “normal BB state” to the “ART ready state”. In this case, the “favorable period” is maintained. On the other hand, when the period to be managed is the “advantageous period” and the transition to the “ART state” described later has not been determined, the transition is made from the “normal BB state” to the “normal state”. The “advantage period” is terminated when the “normal BB state at normal time” ends.

  Here, in the “normal normal BB state”, as shown in FIG. 6, “batting order combination” is not determined as the winning combination. It should be noted that “batting order combination” may be determined as the winning combination in the “normal BB state at normal time”.

(Normal special BB state)
The “normal special BB state” is a state in which a transition is made when a combination of symbols related to the determined BB is displayed on the active line in the “normal carryover state”. Specifically, the “normal special BB state” is a state in which a transition is made when “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” is won and a combination of symbols related to the Black Seven BB is displayed on the active line. is there. The “normal special BB state” corresponds to the “RB gaming state” shown in FIG. 6. In the “RB gaming state”, the “common bell” of the winning number “07” and the winning number “08” “Watermelon”, winning number “09” “weak cherry”, winning number “10” “strong cherry”, winning number “11” “chance role” won, and there is no “losing” This is a more advantageous state for the player than the “normal state”. In the “normal state”, if the winning number “19” “Black Seven BB” is won, as shown in FIG. 9A described later, the lottery for the “advantage period” described later is not performed. Therefore, the period in the “normal carryover state” is the “normal period”. Accordingly, in the “normal carryover state”, the period in the “normal special BB state” in which the combination of symbols related to the black seven BB is displayed on the active line is referred to as “normal period”. Become. Accordingly, “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” has a higher setting value in terms of being easier to win when the setting value is “6” than when the setting value is “1”. It is a BB that is more advantageous for the player than other BBs. On the other hand, since the period in the “normal special BB state” is fixed as the “normal period”, for example, during the “normal special BB state”, the transition lottery to the “ART state” described later is not performed, From the viewpoint of shifting to the “ART state”, it is a disadvantageous BB for the player compared to other BBs.

  Here, in the “normal special BB state”, as shown in FIG. 6, “batting order” is not determined as the winning combination. In the “normal special BB state”, “batting order” may be determined as the winning combination. In the present embodiment, the “normal normal BB state” and the “normal special BB state” may be collectively referred to simply as “normal bonus state”. In the “normal special BB state”, when the bonus termination condition is satisfied, the “normal special BB state” is shifted to the “normal state”.

(Art on top)
The “ART added state” is a state that shifts after the end of the “ART special BB state” described later. Here, “ART added state” means that when there is a BB (BB having a setting difference) having a different lottery value for each setting value, such as “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19”. This is a state in which an extra lottery is performed using BB to add the number of games that can be played in an “ART state” to be described later. In other words, in the ART state or the like, if the winning number “19” “Black Seven BB” is won, after the completion of the “Black Seven BB”, for example, a “specific RT gaming state” different from the RT gaming state shown in FIG. To migrate. The number of games that can be played in the “ART state”, which will be described later, is added using a winning combination that is won only in the “specific RT gaming state” (for example, “special replay” (not shown) or the like is provided). A lottery will be performed. With this configuration, the “specific RT gaming state” is higher when the set value is higher (for example, the set value “6”) than when the set value is lower (for example, the set value “1”). As a result, the opportunity to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” to be described later can be increased, and there is an advantage that the gaming interest is improved. Further, when the BB is won during the “ART added state”, the state is shifted from the “ART added state” to the “ART carryover state” described later. In addition, the “ART added state” stays for a predetermined number of games (for example, “10” games), and when the “push order replay” is won after the predetermined number of games have been consumed, The operation order in which the “combination of symbols” is displayed on the active line is notified, and the state is shifted to the “ART state” described later. The “ART added state” is associated with the advantageous period described later. When the advantageous period described later reaches the “1500” game in the “ART added state”, the “ART additional state” is reached. The “state” is ended and the state is shifted to the “normal state”.

  Details will be described later in the explanation of “advantageous period”, but the maximum number of games that can be played in the “advantageous period” is “1500” games. Even if the number of games in the “ART state” described later remains, the number of games in the “ART state” is cleared. Therefore, for example, when shifting from the “art special BB state during ART” described later to the “ART added state”, the number of digested games in the “advantage period” described below exceeds a predetermined number of games (for example, “1450” games). In this case, the “ART state” may be shifted to “ART state” instead of “ART special BB state”. On the other hand, when shifting from the “art BB state during ART” described later to the “ART added state”, the number of digested games in the “advantage period” described below does not exceed a predetermined number of games (for example, “1450” game). May be shifted from the “art BB state during ART” to the “ART added state”. The reason for this configuration is due to the following events. For example, when the number of digested games in the “advantage period” described later is “1451” and the remaining number of games that can be played in the “ART state” described later is “49” games, the winning number “19” “black” If the number of games in “ART state”, which will be described later, is added in the “ART added state” after winning “Seven BB”, the added amount will be cleared. Therefore, the loss feeling given to the player is large, which contributes to a decrease in the gaming interest. Therefore, as described above, the “artificial BB during ART” described later, depending on whether the number of digested games in the “advantage period” described later exceeds a predetermined number of games (for example, “1450” game) or not. By making the transition destination from the “state” different, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to contribute to lowering the gaming interest. In addition, when shifting from the “art BB state during ART” described later to the “ART added state” described below, the number of digested games in the “advantage period” described below exceeds a predetermined number of games (for example, “1450” games). , The state may be shifted to the “ART added state”. In this case, in the “ART added state”, a lottery for adding the number of games in the “ART state” described later (game number added lottery) is performed, but the number of games obtained when winning the lottery is described below. When it is added to the number of remaining games that can be played in the “ART state”, it is corrected by controlling the sub-control board 400 so that it does not exceed “1500” that is the maximum number of games that can be played in the “advantage period”. It is possible to display. For example, when the number of digested games in the “advantage period” described later is “1451” and the remaining number of games that can be played in the “ART state” described later is “10” games, If the 50 ”game is added, the sub-control board 400 corrects the“ 50 ”game to, for example,“ 10 ”game, and the“ 10 ”game is added in the liquid crystal display 31 or the like. Display. By configuring in this way, the player is not given a sense of loss in appearance, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming a cause of lowering the game interest. In addition, since the display is corrected and displayed under the control of the sub-control board 400, the main control board 300 may be simply shifted from the “art BB state during ART” described later to the “ART added state” described later. Since it is not necessary to determine whether or not the number of digested games in the “advantage period” exceeds a predetermined number of games (for example, “1450” games), the control burden on the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  The “ART added state” is a state in which when the “batting order” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the operation order of the determined “batting order” is notified. Specifically, the operation order of the “push order bell” determined when the “first push order bell” of the winning number “12” to the “fifth push order bell” of the winning number “16” is determined. Is notified. In performing the notification, an “instruction information (present) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 as an instruction information command to be described later, which is a command indicating an operation order corresponding to the determined “push order bell”, and the winning combination As a condition device command to be described later, a “condition device (rounding) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400. Receiving these commands, the sub-control board 400 notifies the determined “push order bell” operation order using the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like via the effect control board 500.

(High probability state)
As shown in FIG. 9B, which will be described later, the “high probability state” shifts to a lottery performed by winning the special small role in the “normal state” (winning to the “high probability state”). State. In addition, the “high probability state” is “18/256” when the “watermelon” with the winning number “08” is selected, as shown in FIG. Winning the lottery, winning “18/256” when winning the “weak cherry” with the winning number “09”, winning the lottery to shift to the “ART ready state” described later, and “strong cherry” with the winning number “10” “72/256” at the time of winning the prize will win a lottery to shift to “ART ready state”, which will be described later, and “72/256” at the time of winning the “chance role” with the winning number “11” will be described later. Winning the lottery for the transition to "Status". On the other hand, in the “normal state”, as shown in FIG. 9B, which will be described later, “2/256” when the “watermelon” with the winning number “08” is selected, the “ART ready state” which will be described later. The winning lottery will be selected, and the winning number “09” will be won by “2/256” when the “weak cherry” is won, and will be selected for the “ART ready state” to be described later. “12/256” at the time of winning “Strong Cherry” will be selected for a lottery to shift to “ART ready state”, which will be described later, and “12/256” at the time of winning “chance role” with winning number “11” will be described later. Winning the lottery to shift to the “ART ready state”. Therefore, from the viewpoint of winning the “ART state”, which will be described later, the case where the special small role is won in the “high probability state” will be described later than when the special small role is won in the “normal state”. Since it is easy to win the “ART state”, the “high probability state” is a more advantageous state for the player than the “normal state”. The “high probability state” is “32/256” when the “normal replay” of the winning number “01” is won, as shown in FIG. The “high probability state” is maintained at “224/256” when the “normal replay” with the winning number “01” is won. In other words, the “high probability state” is not a state where the player stays for a predetermined number of games, but stays until the “Lost Probability State” is entered, and then the “Lotus State” is won by winning the “Normal Replay”. The period of stay is indefinite. In the “high probability state”, when a lottery to shift to the “ART ready state” described later is won, the “high probability state” shifts to the “predictor state” described later. Transition to “ART ready state”. On the other hand, in the “high probability state”, before winning the lottery to shift to “ART ready state” to be described later, if a winning lottery performed by winning “normal replay” is won, Transition to “normal state”. In addition, if the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the state shifts from the “high probability state” to the “ART carry-over state” described later (except for “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19”). The “ART carry-over state” described later is a state in which the BB is elected in the “ART state” described later. Since the state shifts to the “ART state”, the BB winning in the “high probability state” confirms the shift to the “ART state” described later. Therefore, the “high probability state” can be made more advantageous than the “normal state” in which the transition to the “ART state” to be described later is not confirmed by the BB winning, and the player's willingness to play is aroused. Can do. In addition, the BB winning in the “high probability state” may not be determined to be shifted to the “ART state” described later. Further, even when “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” is won, the “high probability state” may be shifted to the “ART carryover state” described later. Further, the “high probability state” may stay for a predetermined period. In this case, the falling lottery is not necessary, and the table shown in FIG. 11B described later and the falling lottery process are unnecessary, so that the control load on the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In addition, the falling lottery in the “high probability state” is performed as follows. That is, when the “high probability state” is entered, as shown in FIG. 11B, when “normal replay” of the winning number “01” is determined as the winning combination, the “high probability state” is changed to the “normal state”. Transition lottery to will be performed. Here, the falling lottery using FIG. 11 (B) in this embodiment is performed when “normal replay” is won, and the winning combination for the falling lottery and the maximum payout number Small role ("push order bell") is different. Therefore, as will be described in detail later, if the winning lottery is won before winning the small payout (“push order bell”), the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ Although the transition from the “high probability state” to the “normal state”, the period managed by the main control board 300 because the small payout (“push order bell”) of the maximum payout number has not yet been won, "(If the state transition and the period transition are performed in different games). That is, in FIG. 7, exceptionally, when it is in the “normal state”, an “advantageous period” may occur. On the other hand, before the fall, if the winning combination of the maximum payout number ("push order bell") is won and the operation order is notified, it will trigger the subsequent "normal replay". The game managed by the main control board 300 is “advantageous” in the game that has won the falling lottery performed in the game, that is, the game that shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 from “high probability state” to “normal state”. There is a case where a transition is made from “period” to “normal period” (when state transition and period transition are performed in the same game). This point will also be described in FIG. 59 described later.

  The “high probability state” is associated with the advantageous period described later. When the advantageous period described later reaches “1500” game in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” The “state” is ended and the state is shifted to the “normal state”.

  In addition, when “normal replay” is used as a falling combination, even if “normal replay” is selected, the falling lottery is not performed until the maximum payout number (“push order bell”) is selected. The falling lottery may be started from the “normal replay” winning after winning the small number of payouts (“push order bell”).

  In the present embodiment, “normal replay” is used as a falling combination, but another winning combination may be used as the falling combination. For example, a “push order bell” may be used as a falling combination. With this configuration, the event of winning the falling lottery before winning the small payout with the maximum payout number ("push order bell") compared to the case where the above-mentioned "normal replay" is a falling combination. Occurrence can be prevented.

  When “normal replay” is used as a falling combination, it is assumed that an effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like is configured as follows. For example, if the falling lottery is won before the small payout (“push order bell”) is won, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed from “high probability state” to “ When the state shifts to the “normal state”, but the period managed by the main control board 300 remains “advantage period” because the small payout (“push order bell”) of the maximum payout number has not been won yet. In the “advantageous period”, an effect that is easily selected in the “high probability state” and difficult to select in the “normal state” is executed as an effect to be executed on the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like. It is assumed that In this case, the sub-control board 400 does not determine the effect based on the “normal state” (with reference to the state), but determines the effect based on the “advantageous period” (with reference to the period). It is preferable to configure. In other words, when the “normal state” is in the “advantage period” but the “high probability state” is not selected as an effect to be executed on the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like, the “normal state” is selected. When an effect that is easy to be selected is executed, it is easy for a player to guess that the state is in the “normal state” from the execution of the effect but that the state is “normal state”, and this also causes a decrease in game entertainment. End up. With respect to such problems, if configured as described above, it is difficult to guess that the state is the “normal state”, and it can be prevented from becoming a factor that lowers the gaming interest.

(Predictive state)
As shown in FIG. 9B, which will be described later, the “predictor state” is a lottery performed by winning a special small role in the “normal state” (winning the “chance state” or “ART ready state” ”Is elected), it is in a state of transition. Further, in the “high probability state”, when the lottery for shifting to the “ART preparation state” performed by winning the special small role is won, the state shifts. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13 to be described later, the “predictor state” has a plurality of predictor games, and each time when the “chance state” is won or when the “ART ready state” is won. The number of precursor games is determined from a plurality of precursor games, and the determined number of precursor games is set. When the determined number of precursor games is set, the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like performs an effect that expects a transition to a “chance state” described later or an “ART ready state” described later. . Thereby, in the “precursor state”, a transition to a “chance state” described later or an “ART ready state” described later can be expected. Then, when the value of the number of precursor games set is “0”, the “predictor state” is shifted to the “chance state” described later in the winning state or the “ART ready state” described later. In addition, when the BB is won in the “precursor state”, the state shifts from the “precursor state” to the “ART carryover state” described later. Note that the BB winning in the “predictive state” is handled in the same manner as the BB winning in the “high probability state” described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. However, in the “predictive state”, when the transition to the “ART ready state” described later has been confirmed, if “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” is won, It will be shifted to "state". In the present embodiment, the “predictor state” is shifted to either a “chance state” described later or an “ART ready state” described later. If the player has not won any of the “ART ready state”, the so-called “gase precursor state” (the “gase precursor state” will be described later) is transferred to the “normal state” after the number of precursor games is exhausted. It is also possible to provide a route that is treated as an “advantageous period”. Here, the “gase precursor state” means that neither the “ART ready state” nor the “chance state” has been won, but the number of games to be executed is the number of games in the “predictor state” shown in FIG. Similarly, in any of the “4” game, “16” game, “24” game, and “32” game, an effect that expects winning of “ART ready state” or “chance state” is executed. This is a state. Then, after passing through the “gaseous precursor state”, it is informed that neither the “ART ready state” or the “chance state” has been won, and then the state is shifted to the “normal state”. In addition, the “predictor state” is a chance-up effect in the “predictor state” that has been won in the “ART ready state” or “chance state” and the “gase precursor state” that has not been won in any of them. Is easier to execute. For example, in the “precursor state”, a specific character is more likely to appear than in the “gaseous precursor state”. Thereby, it is possible to make the player predict whether the “ART ready state” or the “chance state” has been won or not. If the special small role is won in the “gase precursor state” and the lottery to shift to the “ART ready state” is won, the “gase precursor state” may be changed to the “predictor state”. In addition, when “Push Order Bell” is not won in “Gase Predictor State”, the operation sequence of “Push Order Bell” is set to 1 when “Push Order Bell” is won after shifting to “Normal State”. By notifying once, it is possible to give a profit to the player and end an advantageous period described later.

  As described above, by providing the “gaseous precursor state” that is treated as an “advantageous period”, the following effects are obtained. In other words, the “predictor state” is treated as an “advantageous period” as described below, including the “gaseous predecessor state”. The segment 16a of the payout number display 16 constituting the advantageous period display described later is turned on. Here, when a route for shifting from the “precursor state” to the “ART ready state” and a route for shifting from the “precursor state” to the “chance state” and not providing the “gaseous precursor state”, for example, In the lottery performed when the special small role is elected, when the “ART ready state” or the “chance state” is not won, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 constituting the advantageous period display described later Will not light up. In this case, the player has won the special small role, but because the segment 16a is not lit, it can be understood that the player has not won the “ART ready state” or “chance state”. It will lead to a decline in the entertainment interest. Therefore, by providing a “gase precursor state”, whether it is a “predictor state” elected in the “ART ready state” or a “predictor state” elected in the “chance state”, either Even if the “gase sign state” is not won, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 constituting the advantageous period indicator described later is turned on, and the “ART ready state” is won. Whether the player has won the “chance state” or has not won any of them can be prevented until the result is notified through the “predictor state”. Therefore, it leads to prevention of the fall of game entertainment.

  In the “precursor state”, as in the case of the “normal state” described above, when “batting order” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, as shown in the information setting process described later, As an instruction information command to be described later, an “instruction information (none) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400, and as a condition device command to be described later, a command indicating a winning combination, a “condition device (rounding) command” is transmitted. Is transmitted to the sub-control board 400. Other specific configurations are the same as those described in the “normal state”, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

(ART ready state)
As shown in FIG. 9A, which will be described later, the “ART ready state” is a lottery for shifting to an “advantage period” performed by winning BB (excluding the winning number “19”) in the “normal state”. In the normal bonus state in which the player is elected and shifts to the “advantageous period”, the player has won the ART transfer lottery using the table shown in FIG. 10A described later, or as shown in FIG. 9B described later. In addition, in the lottery performed by winning the special small role in the “normal state”, the fact that the “ART ready state” described later was won (transition via the “predictor state”), as shown in FIG. In the “chance state”, it is a state in which a transition is made by winning the “ART ready state” described later. In addition, if BB is won in the “ART ready state”, the “ART ready state” will shift to the “ART carry-over state” described later. In the “ART ready state”, the combination of symbols related to the “transition replay” will be effective. When displayed above, the state shifts from “ART ready state” to “ART state” described later. Further, in the “ART ready state”, as shown in FIG. 10 (B), an extra lottery for adding the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” to be transferred later is obtained by winning a special small role. Configured to do. For example, in the “ART ready state”, if “win water” with the winning number “08” is won, “64/256” is won to add “10” game, and “24/256” is added to “20” game. Is won, and “2/256” is won to add “50” games. The “ART ready state” is associated with an advantageous period to be described later. When the advantageous period to be described later reaches “1500” game in the “ART ready state”, the “ART ready state” is reached. The “state” is ended and the state is shifted to the “normal state”.

  The “ART preparation state” is a state in which when the “batting order combination” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the operation order of the determined “batting order combination” is notified. Specifically, when “Push Order Replay A” of the winning number “02” to “Push Order Replay E” of the winning number “06” is determined, “First Push Order Bell” of the winning number “12” to When the “5th push order bell” of the winning number “16” is determined, the operation order of the determined “batting order combination” is notified. Thus, when “Push Order Replay A” of the winning number “02” to “Push Order Replay E” of the winning number “06” is determined, the player operates the stop button according to the notified operation order. Thus, the combination of symbols related to “transition replay” can be displayed on the active line. Other specific configurations are the same as the contents described in the “ART added state”, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

(Chance state)
As shown in FIG. 9B, which will be described later, the “chance state” is a state in which, in the “normal state”, a lottery performed by winning a special small role is won (winning in the “chance state”) and a transition is made. is there. In the “chance state”, as shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later, a lottery for shifting to the “ART ready state” is performed for all winning combinations. However, “Black Seven BB” with a winning number “19” that has a difference in the lottery value with the set value will not win the lottery to shift to the “ART ready state”. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unfair and unequal with the set value regarding the lottery for shifting to the “ART ready state”. In addition, when the BB is won in the “chance state”, the “chance state” shifts to an “ART carry-over state” described later (however, the “black seven BB” of the winning number “19” is excluded). In addition, since the state transition at the time of BB winning is the same as the high probability state mentioned above, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, the “chance state” is, for example, staying for “20” games, and using the table shown in FIG. 12 described later to “ART ready state” based on the winning combination in each game of the “20” game. The transfer lottery will be performed. In the “chance state”, when the lottery for shifting to the “ART ready state” is won, the “chance state” is shifted to the “ART ready state”. On the other hand, in the “chance state”, if the lottery for shifting to the “ART ready state” is not won, the “chance state” is shifted to the “normal state”.

  The “chance state” is a state in which when the “batting order” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the operation order of the determined “batting order” is notified. Specifically, the operation order of the “push order bell” determined when the “first push order bell” of the winning number “12” to the “fifth push order bell” of the winning number “16” is determined. Is notified. In performing the notification, an “instruction information (present) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 as an instruction information command to be described later, which is a command indicating an operation order corresponding to the determined “push order bell”, and the winning combination As a condition device command to be described later, a “condition device (rounding) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400. Receiving these commands, the sub-control board 400 notifies the determined “push order bell” operation order using the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like via the effect control board 500. The “chance state” is associated with an advantageous period to be described later, and if the “push order bell” is never won between “20” games in the “chance state”, You may comprise. For example, in the “chance state” “20” game, if the “push order bell” has never been won, the “normal state” is transferred to the “normal state”. When the “order bell” is won, the player may benefit by notifying the operation order of the “push order bell” once, and the advantageous period described later may be terminated. In addition, for example, if the “push order bell” was never won during the “20” game in the “chance state”, the “push order bell” was never won during the “20” game. As a privilege, it is possible to shift to the “ART ready state” and give a profit to the player.

(ART state)
“ART state” means that a combination of symbols related to “Migration Replay” is displayed on the active line in “ART added state”, or a combination of symbols related to “Migration Replay” in “ART ready state” Is displayed on the active line. The “ART state” is a left stop button 11 and a middle stop in order to display a combination of symbols related to the correct bell on the active line when “push order bell” is won by an internal lottery process described later. In this state, the operation order of the button 12 and the right stop button 13 is notified. Further, as shown in FIG. 10B described later, when a special small role is won in the “ART state”, an extra lottery for adding the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is performed. For example, if the winning number “08” “Watermelon” is won, “64/256” is won for the addition of “10” game, “24/256” is won for the addition of “20” game, and “2 / “256” wins the addition of the “50” game and does not win the addition of the “100” game. In addition, when BB is won in the “ART state”, the state shifts from the “ART state” to the “ART carryover state” described later. On the other hand, in the “ART state”, when an ART state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, the state shifts from the “ART state” to the “normal state”. The “ART state” is associated with the advantageous period described later. When the advantageous period described later reaches the “1500” game in the “ART state”, the “ART state” is set at the time of arrival. When finished, the process shifts to the “normal state”.

  As described above, the “ART state” is a state in which when the “batting order” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the operation order of the determined “batting order” is notified. Specifically, the operation order of the “push order bell” determined when the “first push order bell” of the winning number “12” to the “fifth push order bell” of the winning number “16” is determined. Is notified. In performing the notification, an “instruction information (present) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 as an instruction information command to be described later, which is a command indicating an operation order corresponding to the determined “push order bell”, and the winning combination As a condition device command to be described later, a “condition device (rounding) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400. Receiving these commands, the sub-control board 400 notifies the determined “push order bell” operation order using the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like via the effect control board 500.

(Carry-over state during ART)
"ART carry-over state" means BB winning in "ART added state" or BB winning in "high probability state" (excluding "Black Seven BB" with winning number "19") or "precursor state" BB winning (“Black Seven BB” of winning number “19” is limited to the case where the transition to “ART state” is confirmed), or BB winning in “chance state” (however, winning number “19” “Black Seven BB” of “)”, or BB winning in “ART ready state” or BB winning in “ART state”. The “ART carry-over state” is a state in which the user stays until the combination of symbols related to the determined BB is displayed on the active line. Further, since the “ART carry-over state” corresponds to the “third RT gaming state” shown in FIG. 6, the BB lottery is not performed. “ART carry-over state” is an “advantage period” and special small roles are won. Even if the special small role is won, games can be played in “ART state”. An extra lottery that adds the number of games is not performed. Then, in the “art carryover state during ART” transitioned by the winning number “19” being determined, when the combination of symbols related to Black Seven BB is displayed on the active line, the “art carryover state during ART” The combination of symbols related to the determined BB is on the active line in the “art carry-over state during ART” that has been transferred to the “special BB state during ART” described below and the BB with other winning numbers determined. Is displayed, the state is shifted from the “ART carry-over state” to the “ART normal BB state” described later. The “ART carry-over state” is associated with the advantageous period described later. When the advantageous period described later reaches the “1500” game in the “ART carry-over state”, the “normal period” from the point of arrival is reached. Then, after the BB that has been won is digested as the BB of the “normal period”, the process shifts to the “normal state”.

  As described above, the “carry-over state during ART” is a state in which when the “batting order” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the operation order of the determined “batting order” is notified. Specifically, the operation order of the “push order bell” determined when the “first push order bell” of the winning number “12” to the “fifth push order bell” of the winning number “16” is determined. Is notified. In performing the notification, an “instruction information (present) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 as an instruction information command to be described later, which is a command indicating an operation order corresponding to the determined “push order bell”, and the winning combination As a condition device command to be described later, a “condition device (rounding) command” is transmitted to the sub-control board 400. Receiving these commands, the sub-control board 400 notifies the determined “push order bell” operation order using the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like via the effect control board 500. Here, in the “ART carry-over state”, when the determined operation order of the “push order bell” is not notified, in particular, in the “ART state”, BB is won and the “ART carry-over state” is selected. In the case of transition, the notification of the operation order performed in the “ART state” is not suddenly performed. As a result, the player senses that BB has been won, so that the operation order is notified in the “ART carryover state”. “ART carry-over state” is the same as “normal carry-over state” in the meaning of the period from winning a BB until the combination of symbols related to the winning BB is displayed on the active line. However, it is different from the “normal carry-over state” that is the “normal period” or “standby period” in that it is treated as an “advantageous period”.

(Normal BB state during ART)
The “normal BB state during ART” is a state in which a transition is made when the combination of symbols related to the determined BB is displayed on the active line in the “over carry state during ART”. Specifically, “normal BB state during ART” is “Red Seven BB” with winning number “17”, “White Seven BB” with winning number “18”, “Watermelon + Red Seven BB” with winning number “20”. ”, Winning number“ 21 ”“ weak cherry + red seven BB ”, winning number“ 22 ”“ strong cherry + red seven BB ”, winning number“ 23 ”“ chance role + red seven BB ”, winning number“ “Watermelon + White Seven BB” of “24”, “Weak Cherry + White Seven BB” of winning number “25”, “Strong Cherry + White Seven BB” of winning number “26”, “Chance role” of winning number “27” + White Seven BB ”,“ Watermelon + Black Seven BB ”with winning number“ 28 ”,“ Weak Cherry + Black Seven BB ”with winning number“ 29 ”,“ Strong Cherry + Black Seven BB ”with winning number“ 30 ”, Winning number “31” “Chance role + Black Cebu” Won either BB "is a state in which a combination of symbols relating to winning the BB is transferred to be displayed on the pay line. The “normal BB state during ART” corresponds to the “RB gaming state” shown in FIG. 6. In the “RB gaming state”, the “common bell” of the winning number “07” and the winning number “08” “Watermelon”, “weak cherry” with winning number “09”, “strong cherry” with winning number “10”, and “chance role” with winning number “11” are won, and there is no “lost”. In addition, since the “normal BB state during ART” shifts to the “ART state” after the BB ends, it is more advantageous for the player than the “normal BB state during normal operation”. The “normal BB state during ART” is associated with the advantageous period described later, and when the advantageous period described later reaches “1500” game in the “normal BB state during ART”, As the “normal period”, the elected BB is digested as the BB of the “normal period”, and then the “normal state” is entered.

  Here, in the “normal BB state during ART”, as shown in FIG. 6, “batting order” is not determined as the winning combination. It should be noted that “batting order combination” may be determined as the winning combination in the “normal BB state at normal time”.

(Special BB state during ART)
The “art BB state during ART” is a state in which a transition is made when the combination of symbols related to the determined BB is displayed on the active line in the “art carryover state during ART”. Specifically, “Special BB state during ART” is a state in which a transition is made when a combination of symbols related to Black Seven BB is displayed on the active line when “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” is won. is there. The “art BB state during ART” corresponds to the “RB gaming state” shown in FIG. 6. In the “RB gaming state”, the “common bell” of the winning number “07” and the winning number “08” “Watermelon”, “weak cherry” with winning number “09”, “strong cherry” with winning number “10”, and “chance role” with winning number “11” are won, and there is no “lost”. In addition, the “special BB state during ART” shifts to the “ART state” through the “ART added state” after the BB ends, which is advantageous to the player compared to the “normal special BB state”. The “art special BB state” is associated with an advantageous period described later. When the advantageous period described later reaches “1500” game in the “art BB state during ART”, the game starts from the point of arrival. As the “normal period”, the elected BB is digested as the BB of the “normal period”, and then the “normal state” is entered.

  Here, in the “art special BB state”, as shown in FIG. 6, “batting order” is not determined as a winning combination. In the “art special BB state”, the “batting order” may be determined as the winning combination. In the present embodiment, the “normal BB state during ART” and the “special BB state during ART” may be collectively referred to simply as “bonus state during ART”.

  Next, the description of each period and the relationship between each state and each period will be described.

(Normal period)
The “normal period” is a period in which the notification of the “operation order” is limited for the above “batting order”. In addition, when providing the above-mentioned "push position combination", it is a period when notification of "push position" is restricted. Specifically, even if the “batting order combination” is determined as the winning combination, the “operation order” using the payout number display 16 or the liquid crystal display device 31 is not notified. Further, the lottery to shift to the “advantage period” described later may be permitted or limited depending on the state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, in the “normal period” when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state”, a lottery for shifting to the “advantage period” described later is permitted and is managed by the main control board 300. In the “normal period” when the state is “normal carryover state”, the lottery for shifting to the “advantage period” described later is restricted, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal BB state during normal operation”. The “normal period” in a certain case is a “normal period” when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “special BB state at normal time” when the transition lottery to the “advantage period” described later is limited. Transition lottery to the “advantage period” described later is restricted. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state”, the period managed by the main control board 300 is only “normal period”, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ In the case of “normal carryover state”, the period managed by the main control board 300 may be a “normal period” or a “waiting period” described later, and may be managed by the main control board 300. Is in the “normal BB state at normal time”, the period managed by the main control board 300 may be a “normal period” or may be an “advantageous period” to be described later. When the managed state is the “normal special BB state”, the period managed by the main control board 300 is only the “normal period”.

(Waiting period)
The “standby period” is a period during which the notification of the “operation order” is limited for the above “batting order”. In addition, when providing the above-mentioned "push position combination", it is a period when notification of "push position" is restricted. Specifically, even if the “batting order combination” is determined as the winning combination, the “operation order” using the payout number display 16 or the liquid crystal display device 31 is not notified. In addition, since the “standby period” is a period that shifts only when the transition to the “advantage period” described later is confirmed, in the “standby period”, the transition lottery to the “advantage period” described later is performed. Limited. In addition, as a specific example of the transition from the “normal period” to the “standby period”, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the “normal state”, “Red Seven BB” with the winning number “17” or the winning Winner of “White Seven BB” with the number “18” or winning lottery for the “Advantageous Period” to be described later by winning any BB from the winning number “20” to the winning number “31” Then, the state managed by the main control board 300 changes from “normal state” to “normal carryover state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 changes from “normal period” to “standby period”. On the other hand, the state managed by the main control board 300 will not be won unless the lottery for the transition to the “advantageous period” described later, which is performed by winning any one of the winning numbers “20” to “31”, is won. Although the “normal state” is changed to the “normal carryover state”, the period managed by the main control board 300 remains the “normal period”. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal carryover state” and the period managed by the main control board 300 is “waiting period”, the combination of symbols related to the selected BB is effective. When displayed on the line, the state managed by the main control board 300 changes from the “normal carry-over state” to the “normal normal BB state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 starts from the “waiting period” and will be described later. "Advantageous period". In the “standby period”, for example, even if the “special small role” is won, the lottery to shift to the “ART state” is limited (when the BB is activated and becomes the “advantage period”, the “ART ("Transition lottery to state" is allowed). In addition, the “standby period” is not necessarily provided, and the period may be configured only by the “normal period” and the “advantage period” described later. In the “normal state”, the winning number “17” “Red Seven BB” or the winning number “18” “White Seven BB” is won, or the winning number “20” to the winning number “31” is selected. When winning a lottery for a transition to an “advantage period” described later, which is performed by winning such a BB, whether or not to shift to a “waiting period” may be determined by lottery. If the lottery is won, the “normal period” will be changed to the “standby period”, and if the lottery is not won, the “normal period” (normal state) will be changed to the “favorable period” (normal carryover state). . Further, the shift to the “waiting period” may be linked to the winning combination. For example, “Red Seven BB” with a winning number “17” and “White Seven BB” with a winning number “18” are confirmed to be “advantageous” from the “normal period” (normal state). Other BBs may shift from “normal period” to “standby period” by shifting to “period” (normal carryover state).

(Advantageous period)
The “advantageous period” is a period during which the notification of the “operation order” is permitted for the “batting order” described above. In addition, when providing the above-mentioned "push position combination", it is a period when the notification of "push position" is permitted. Specifically, when the “batting order combination” is determined as the winning combination, the “operation order” is notified using the payout number display 16, the liquid crystal display device 31, and the like. However, even in the “advantageous period”, depending on the state managed by the main control board 300, when “batting order” is determined as the winning combination, notification is always performed, and “batting order” is the winning combination. Even if it is determined as, if the notification has already been performed once, there are a case where notification is not performed and a case where “batting order” is not determined as a winning combination in the first place. In addition, the “advantage period” is (b) when the number of games played continuously as “advantage period” reaches the “1500” game, and (b) “winning role to pay out the maximum payout number” is won. In addition, a plurality of end conditions are defined, for example, when “operation order” in which a combination of symbols related to “correct answer bell” is displayed on an active line is notified, or (c) when BB ends. .

  For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state” (the gaming state is “second RT gaming state” shown in FIG. 6), “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination. In this case, every time it is determined, the “operation order” using the payout number display 16 or the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified. As a result, the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” shown in FIG. Since the displayed “operation order” is notified, the player must stop each stop button in accordance with the notified “operation order” so that the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is always on the active line. Can be displayed. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, when the combination of symbols related to “correct answer bell” is operated in “operation order” other than “operation order” displayed on the active line, the symbol related to “failed bell” Or a combination of symbols related to “Blank” without medal payout is displayed on the active line, so that the combination of symbols related to “correct bell” is displayed on the active line. It is more advantageous for the player than when notification is not performed.

  For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART ready state” (the game state is “first RT game state” shown in FIG. 6), “push order bell” is the winning combination. When determined, or when “push order replay” is determined as a winning combination, every time it is determined, the “operation order” is notified using the payout number display 16, the liquid crystal display device 31, etc. Is called. Thereby, the player stops each stop button according to the notified “operation order”, so that the combination of symbols related to “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line, or “transition replay” shown in FIG. Can be displayed on the active line, and with the display of the symbol combination related to “Transition Replay”, the “ART state” (the game state is “the second RT gaming state shown in FIG. 6). )).

  For example, when the states managed by the main control board 300 are “high probability state” and “chance state” (the game state is “first RT gaming state” shown in FIG. 6), these states are set. At the time of winning the first “push order bell” after the transition, a combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” using the payout number display 16, the liquid crystal display device 31, etc. is displayed on the effective line. The “order” is notified. On the other hand, when the “push order bell” is won after the notification of the “operation order” in which the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line, even if it is the “favorable period”, the payout There is no notification of the “operation order” in which the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line using the number indicator 16, the liquid crystal display device 31, or the like. As a result, the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” can be displayed on the active line, but it is shifted to the “high probability state” and “chance state” that are positioned as the “advantage period”. It is possible to secure the profit of doing. In addition, in the “advantage period” in the “high probability state” and “chance state”, after the “operation order” in which the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line, it is optional. The “advantage period” may be terminated in the game. For example, the “advantage period” may be ended in the game in which the “operation order” is notified that the combination of symbols related to “correct bell” is displayed on the active line, or the symbol related to “correct bell” The “advantage period” may be ended in the game after the “10” game from the game in which the “operation order” is displayed on the active line. Also, not only when the first “push order bell” is won, but when the “push order bell” is won for the third time, a combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line. You may go. Further, the notification of the “operation order” in which the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line is not limited to once, and may be performed a plurality of times. In the “high probability state”, the “push order bell” is not won, and the “normal state” is entered first. In the “chance state”, the “push order bell” is not won, When the transition is made to the “normal state” first, when the “push order bell” is selected in the “normal state” of the transition destination, the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line. May be notified and the “advantage period” may be terminated. It should be noted that the “advantageous period” may be terminated in the same manner in the “gaseous precursor state” described above.

  Further, for example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “precursor state” (the gaming state is “the first RT gaming state” shown in FIG. 6), the first after the transition to these states When the “push order bell” is selected, the “operation order” is displayed using the payout number display 16, the liquid crystal display device 31, etc., and the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line. Is called. On the other hand, when the “push order bell” is won after the notification of the “operation order” in which the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line, even if it is the “favorable period”, the payout There is no notification of the “operation order” in which the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line using the number indicator 16, the liquid crystal display device 31, or the like. In the “predictor state”, if the “push order bell” is not won, if the transition destination after the “predictor state” is “ART ready state”, “ART ready state” or after What is necessary is just to alert | report the "operation order" by which the combination of the symbol which concerns on a "correct answer bell" is displayed on an active line in the "ART state" which transfers. In addition, if the transition destination after the “predictor state” is “chance state”, the “operation order” notification in which the symbol combination related to “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line in “chance state” If the “push order bell” is not won even in the “chance state”, as described above, when the “push order bell” is won in the “normal state”, the symbol related to the “correct answer bell” The “advantage period” may be terminated by notifying the “operation order” in which the combination is displayed on the active line.

  Further, for example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART added state” (the gaming state is the above-mentioned “specific RT gaming state”), “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination. When the above-mentioned “special replay” is determined as the winning combination, the “operation order” using the payout number display 16 or the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified.

  Further, for example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “art BB state during ART” and “normal BB state during ART” (the game state is “RB game state” shown in FIG. 6), Although the “batting order” is not won, but after the completion of these states, the state shifts to the “ART state”. It is possible to secure the profits of the transition to the “special BB state” and the “normal BB state during ART”.

  Here, after shifting to the “advantageous period”, the maximum number of games that can stay in the “advantageous period” is “1500” games. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the “normal state”, when the “ART ready state” is won, first, the “normal state” is shifted to the “precursor state”. Since the “predictor state” is positioned as the “advantage period”, the “1500” game is counted with the game shifted to the “predictor state” as the starting game. After that, when the “1500” game is reached in the “ART state”, the “advantage period” is ended and the “normal period” is ended, and the “ART state” is ended even in the “ART state”. As a result, the state shifts to the “normal state”. That is, when the “1500” game arrives, the ART state game number counter and the like managed by the main RAM 303 are initialized. In the “ART state”, if the BB is won and the “1500” game is reached during the “Special BB state during ART” or the “Normal BB state during ART”, the “Advantage period” is ended. If the BB end condition is not satisfied in the game that has reached the “1500” game, the “normal period” is entered, but the “normal period” is handled, but the “special BB state during ART” or “ The “normal BB state during ART” may be continued. In this case, “the special BB state during ART” and “the normal BB state during ART” which are originally positioned as “advantageous periods” are treated as “normal periods” exceptionally. Even if the BB end condition is not satisfied in the game that has reached the “1500” game, the BB is ended along with the transition from the “advantage period” to the “normal period”, and the “ART You may make it transfer from "medium special BB state" or "ART normal BB state" to "normal state". If the BB end condition is not satisfied in the game that has reached the “1500” game, the “advantage period” is continued, but the extra lottery or the like related to the “ART state” is not performed (substantially “ It is also possible to shift from the “advantage period” to the “normal period” after the BB termination condition is satisfied.

  Also, if the “push order bell” is not won between the “1500” games, the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” using the payout number display 16, the liquid crystal display device 31, etc. is on the effective line. Even if the “operation order” displayed on the screen is not notified, the “advantage period” is ended when the “1500” game is reached. In addition, as mentioned above in the explanation of “normal BB state at normal time”, the transition to the “ART state” is not determined at the end of the “normal BB state at normal time” of the “advantage period” The “advantageous period” is ended when the “normal BB state at the normal time” ends. As described above, by providing the maximum number of games that can stay in the “advantageous period” continuously, it is possible to prevent a significant increase in euphoria and to achieve a balance between the player and the game store.

  Here, “high probability state”, “precursor state” (including “gasse precursor state”), “ART ready state”, “chance state”, “ART state”, “art addition”, which are positioned as “advantageous period” In each of the states, the “push order bell” is not won, and the combination of symbols related to the “correct bell” is displayed on the active line. When the “1500” game, which is the number of games that can be stayed, is reached, priority is given to the arrival of the “1500” game, the “advantage period” is ended, and each state is shifted to the “normal state”. Let In this case, although the “operation order” is not notified, the fact that the “1500” game stays continuously for the advantageous period is to end the “advantage period” as securing a certain profit to the player. Become.

  Here, the “winning combination for paying out the maximum number of payouts” refers to a winning combination with a large number of medals to be paid out to the player among the winning combinations for which the operation order is defined. That is, in this embodiment, the winning number “02” to the winning number “06” and the winning number “12” to the winning number “16” constitute the winning combination in which the operation order is defined. Since the number “12” to the winning number “16” is defined as the winning combination from which “9” medals are paid out, the winning number “12” to the winning number “16” It will fall under "Winning role to be issued". Even if there is a winning combination (“3” bell role) where the payout of “3” medals can be received, the winning numbers “12” to “16” will “pay the maximum payout number”. It will fall under “winning role”. In addition, the “operation order” in which the combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line is notified, which is the winning condition for winning the maximum payout number, which is the above-mentioned advantageous period end condition. To the last, "the first push order bell" of winning number "12", "the second push order bell" of winning number "13", "the third pushing order bell" of winning number "14", the winning number The combination of symbols corresponding to “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line by selecting either “4th push order bell” of “15” or “5th push order bell” of winning number “16”. “Order” is to be notified, and it is assumed that a winning combination (“3” bell role) that allows the payout of “3” medals is provided. Even if the operation order is notified, the operation order in the “3” bell combination Of the notification is, the end condition is not satisfied of the advantageous period described above. In other words, no matter how many times the operation order in the “3” bell role is notified, the “first push order bell” with the winning number “12”, the “second push order bell” with the winning number “13”, the winning Winning number “14”, “3rd pushing order bell”, winning number “15”, “4th pushing order bell”, winning number “16”, “5th pushing order bell”, winning “correct answer bell” Until the “operation order” in which the symbol combination is displayed on the active line is notified, the above-described advantageous period termination condition is not satisfied.

  Also, even if the “watermelon” medal payout shown in FIG. 4 is “15”, “watermelon” is not the winning combination for notifying the operation order, so how many times can the “watermelon” be won? , “No. 1 push order bell” with winning number “12”, “No. 2 push order bell” with winning number “13”, “No. 3 push order bell” with winning number “14”, “No. “Operation order” is displayed in which the combination of symbols related to “correct answer bell” is displayed on the active line by winning either “4th push order bell” or “5th push order bell” of the winning number “16”. Until this time, the above-mentioned advantageous period termination condition is not satisfied.

(Specific example when winning BB during “Advantage”)
Here, a description will be given of a specific example performed in relation to the above-described “1500” game when BB is won in the “ART state” which is an “advantageous period”. The average number of games required for the “art BB state during ART” or “normal BB state during ART” is “34” games.

(When "1500" game is not satisfied at the end of BB)
For example, in the ART state, when the BB is won, if the value of the advantageous period counter (to be described later) managing the advantageous period “1500” game is greater than “34” described above, Since the value of the advantageous period counter, which will be described later, does not become “0” (the “1500” game is not satisfied at the end of the BB), in this case, the selected “Special BB state during ART” or “Normal BB state during ART” As an effect during the bonus “”, an effect (first effect) in the normal bonus state during ART is performed.

(When "1500" game is satisfied at the end of BB)
On the other hand, for example, in the ART state, when the value of a later-described advantageous period counter managing the advantageous period “1500” game when winning BB is smaller than “34” described above, BB At the end, the value of the advantageous period counter, which will be described later, becomes “0” (the “1500” game is satisfied at the end of the BB). In this case, the selected “Special BB state during ART” or “Normal during ART” As an effect during the bonus in the “BB state”, an effect (second effect) in a special bonus state during the ART in which the content of the effect is different from the first effect described above. Here, the second effect is configured to perform a so-called ending effect that notifies the end of the advantageous period, and the player confirms the second effect so that the advantageous period is reached together with the end of the BB. It is possible to grasp that will end. By performing such a second effect, it is possible to smoothly end the advantageous period at the end of the BB, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by suddenly ending the advantageous period.

(First feature point in relation to “1500” game and ART addition lottery)
Next, after shifting to the “advantageous period”, the first feature point in the relationship between the maximum number of games “1500” that can stay in the “advantageous period” and the lottery in the ART state is listed. .

  First, the ART state in this embodiment employs a “game number management type”. Here, “game number management type” means that, for example, “50” game is given as the initial number of games, and is subtracted (added and added) every time a game is played from the “50” game. In other words, the specification is such that the ART state ends when the game becomes “0”. In such a game number management-type ART state, the total number of games played in the ART state and the remaining number of games that can be played in the ART state is equal to or greater than the “1500” game described above. In such a case, for example, even if a special small role is won, an additional lottery in the ART state using the ART additional lottery table in FIG. 10B is not performed. For example, in the ART state, when the “1400” game is played and the number of remaining ART states is “100” games, even if the special small role is won, the ART extra lottery in FIG. It is configured not to perform an extra lottery in the ART state using a table. Note that the lottery itself may be added, but the lottery result is a “0” game. By configuring in this way, the following effects can be expected. In other words, if there is no restriction on the extra lottery without such a configuration, the number of games in the remaining ART state can be added, but when the “1500” game is reached, it is forcibly terminated. It becomes. For example, in the ART state, when the “1400” game is played and the remaining number of ART state games is “100” game, the special small role is won and the “100” game is added. Since the remaining number of games that can be played in the ART state does not change for the remaining “100” games, the addition of “100” games is wasted. If it does so, it will also become a cause to reduce a player's willingness to play. Therefore, as described above, by restricting the extra lottery, it is possible to prevent the extra addition as described above from being wasted, and to prevent the player from reducing the game motivation. It leads to.

  In the above description, if the total number of games including the number of games played in the ART state and the remaining number of games that can be played in the ART state is equal to or greater than the “1500” game described above, for example, Even if a special small role is won, the ART state using the ART addition lottery table of FIG. 10 (B) is configured not to be selected, but for example, in the normal state, the ART state is won. In this case, the advantageous period starts from the precursor state before the transition to the ART state, so the number of games played in the precursor state, the number of games played in the ART state, and the remaining games that can be played in the ART state When the total number of games with the number of games is equal to or greater than the “1500” game described above, for example, even if a special small role is won, A in FIG. Plus lottery ART state using the T plus lottery table may be configured not to perform. Even if comprised in this way, the effect similar to the effect mentioned above is acquired.

  In the above description, if the total number of games including the number of games played in the ART state and the remaining number of games that can be played in the ART state is equal to or greater than the “1500” game described above, for example, Even if a special small role is won, the ART state using the ART addition lottery table of FIG. 10 (B) is configured not to perform the lottery, but for example, a game played in the ART state Even if the total number of games including the number of games and the number of remaining games that can be played in the ART state is “1400” games, an additional lottery may be performed. However, in this case, as a result of the extra lottery, the point that the “100” game is given is restricted, and the number of extra games is determined from the “10” game, the “20” game, and the “50” game. To. That is, as the total number of games played in the ART state and the remaining number of games that can be played in the ART state approaches “1500” games, the number of additional games may be reduced. . If comprised in this way, the effect similar to the effect mentioned above will be acquired.

(Second feature point in relation to “1500” game and ART addition lottery)
Next, after the transition to the “advantageous period”, the second feature point in the relationship between the maximum number of games “1500” that can stay in the “advantageous period” and the lottery in the ART state is listed. .

  Unlike the above-described first feature point, the second feature point is that no restriction is imposed on the extra lottery and the result of the extra lottery is not notified. For example, even if the “1400” game is played in the ART state and the remaining number of ART state games is “100”, the special small role is won and the addition of the “100” game is determined. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like does not display an image won in the extra lottery or that the “100” game is awarded. If comprised in this way, the effect similar to the said 1st feature point can be anticipated. In addition, whether or not the total number of games played in the ART state and the remaining number of games that can be played in the ART state is equal to or greater than the “1500” game described above on the sub-control board 400. If the determination is made, a part of the processing in the main control board 300 can be made unnecessary, so that the control burden of the main control board 300 having a limited capacity can be expected.

  The ART state in the present embodiment may be any specification of “game number management type”, “difference number management type”, and “set number management type”. Here, the “difference number management type” means that the difference between the payout number of medals and the inserted number of medals has reached a predetermined number (for example, “3000”). The specification is such that the ART state ends. In addition, when the winning lottery in the ART state is won, for example, “30” is added and the number is added. In the “difference number management type”, the addition (addition) of the number of sheets may not be performed in a situation where it is determined that the difference number is “3000”. Further, as the difference number approaches “3000”, the number of sheets to be added (addition) may be reduced. In addition, in a situation where the difference number is determined to be “3000”, the addition of the number (addition) is determined, but the image of the addition (addition) is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like. It may be. “Set number management type” means that the ART state is managed by, for example, “1” set and “40” game, and the condition for transition to the next set is satisfied at the end of “1” set, The specification is such that the ART state of the “40” game of the “2” set is performed. In addition, when the ART state is added to the lottery, it is added by the number of sets, for example, “1” set addition. In the “set number management type” also, when the number of games calculated from the number of games played in the ART state is determined to be “1500” games, the number of sets is added (added) May not be performed. In a situation where the number of games calculated from the number of sets played in the ART state is determined to be “1500” games, the addition of the number of sets (addition) is determined, but the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like, the set number addition (addition) image may not be displayed.

(Advantageous period indicator)
Next, the advantageous period indicator will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the payout number display 16 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 is also used as the advantageous period indicator, but a dedicated advantageous period indicator may be provided.

  FIG. 8 shows a state in which the segment 16a is turned off (upper stage in FIG. 8) and a state in which the segment 16a is turned on (lower stage in FIG. 8). When the “normal period” described above, the seg 16a is turned off (upper part of FIG. 8), and when the “standby period” described above, the seg 16a is turned off (upper part of FIG. 8). Thus, during the above-described “advantageous period”, the segment 16a is lit (lower row in FIG. 8). Therefore, when the seg 16a is turned off, the player can grasp that the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal period” or the “standby period”. When it is lit, the player can grasp that the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantageous period”. Since the segment 16a is turned on during the “advantageous period”, when the “advantageous period” extends over a plurality of games, the segment 16a continues to be lit over a plurality of games. Therefore, particularly in the “advantage period”, for example, notification of the operation order performed using the payout number display 16 when “push order bell” is won, and combinations of symbols related to “correct bell” in “push order bell” In addition to notifying the payout number of medals performed using the payout number display device 16 at the time of winning, there may be a notification of an “advantageous period”. For example, at the time of winning a combination of symbols related to “correct answer bell”, “9” is displayed on the payout number display 16, but the segment 16 a is also lit, so “9.” Will be displayed. Therefore, even if the payout number display 16 is also used as an advantageous period indicator, the notification of the operation order and the notification of the number of medals to be paid out are not significantly unclear, and a dedicated advantageous period indicator is not required. This can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

(Advantageous period transition decision table)
Next, the advantageous period transition determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The advantageous period transition determination table is stored in the main ROM 302.

  The advantageous period transition determination table is configured for the normal state (when BB is won) shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B for the normal state (when special small role is won). In the normal state (when BB is won) shown in FIG. 9A, whether or not the BB operation is set as an “advantageous period” when any of the winning numbers “17” to “31” is won. It is a table for determining. In other words, if “Red Seven BB” with the winning number “17” is selected, “256/256” is selected to make the BB operation an “advantageous period”, and “White Seven BB” with the winning number “18”. If it is, “256/256” and winning during BB operation will be won. As shown in FIG. 6, the winning number “17” “Red Seven BB” and the winning number “18” “White Seven BB” are winning numbers that are difficult to win. By confirming the transition to “period”, it is possible to give the winning privilege to the winning number that is difficult to win. Next, “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” is not won by setting the “favorable period” during BB operation. That is, during the BB operation of “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19”, the “normal period” is set. As shown in FIG. 6, the winning number “19” “Black Seven BB” is a winning combination having different lottery values when the setting value is “1” and when the setting value is “6”. Therefore, such a winning combination is uniformly set to the “normal period” to prevent an unfair feeling that the higher the set value, the more advantageous to the player. When winning the “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19”, the lottery for the “advantage period” does not have to be implemented, but the lottery for the transition is made, but “256/256” is not won. It may be made to become.

  Next, if the winning number is “Watermelon + Red Seven BB” with the winning number “20”, “128/256” will be won to make the BB operation an “advantageous period”, and “128/256” will be the BB It is not elected to set the “operating period” during operation. Next, if the winning number “21” is “Weak Cherry + Red Seven BB”, it will be “128/256” and BB operation will be set to “Advantage”, and “128/256” It is not elected to set the “favorable period” during BB operation. Next, if the winning number is “22”, “Strong Cherry + Red Seven BB”, “192/256” and BB operation will be selected as “Advantageous Period”, and “64/256” It is not elected to set the “favorable period” during BB operation. Next, if the winning number “23” is “chance role + red seven BB”, it is “192/256” and the BB operation is set to “favorable period”, and “64/256” It is not elected to set the “favorable period” during BB operation. Next, if the winning number is “24”, “Watermelon + White Seven BB”, “128/256” and BB operation will be selected as “Advantageous Period”, and “128/256” will be BB. It is not elected to set the “operating period” during operation. Next, if the winning number is “25”, “Weak Cherry + White Seven BB”, “128/256” and BB operation will be selected as “Advantageous”, and “128/256” It is not elected to set the “favorable period” during BB operation. Next, if the winning number is “26”, “Strong Cherry + White Seven BB”, “192/256” and BB operation will be selected as “Advantageous”, and “64/256” It is not elected to set the “favorable period” during BB operation. Next, if the winning number “27” is “chance role + white seven BB”, it is “192/256”, and the BB operation is set to “advantageous period”, and “64/256” It is not elected to set the “favorable period” during BB operation. Next, if it is “Watermelon + Black Seven BB” with the winning number “28”, it is “128/256” and it is won to set the BB operation to “Advantageous period”, and “128/256”, BB It is not elected to set the “operating period” during operation. Next, if the winning number is “29”, “Weak Cherry + Black Seven BB”, “128/256” and BB operation will be selected as “Advantageous period”, and “128/256” It is not elected to set the “favorable period” during BB operation. Next, if the winning number is “30”, “Strong Cherry + Black Seven BB”, “192/256” and BB operation will be selected as “Advantageous Period”, and “64/256” It is not elected to set the “favorable period” during BB operation. Next, if the winning number is “31”, “Chance role + Black Seven BB”, it will be “192/256” and BB operation will be selected as “Advantageous period”, and “64/256” It is not elected to set the “favorable period” during BB operation. Note that the winning numbers “28” to “31” relating to “Black Seven BB” may not be shifted to the “advantageous period” as in the case of the winning number “19”. In this way, the player can recognize that “Black Seven BB” does not shift to the “advantageous period” uniformly, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9A, only the “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” is not shifted to the “Advantageous Period” (the “Black Seven BB” with other winning numbers is shifted. For example, the disappointment of the player when the winning of “Black Seven BB” is notified can be suppressed, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be prevented. Note that the values shown in FIG. 9A may be arbitrarily changed.

  In addition, in FIG. 9 (A), you may comprise as follows. That is, in FIG. 9A, it is configured to draw only whether or not the BB operation is in the “advantage period”, but, for example, whether or not to shift to the “ART state” when the BB is won When a lottery of “No” is performed and the shift to the “ART” state is won, BB operation may be set as an “advantage period”. Further, when a specific BB is won, the winning of “ART state” is confirmed at the same time, so that the BB operation may be set as an “advantage period”. Here, when the BB operation is the “advantageous period” and the BB is completed without winning the lottery for the transition to the “ART state”, the “advantageous period” may be terminated with the end of the BB. That is, BB is not in a state where the batting order notification related to “push order bell” is performed or in a state where the player stays over the “1500” game, but as indicated by a lottery value in “RB gaming state” in FIG. In each game, a winning combination with a medal payout is won and a medal payout is received. Therefore, since the player can guarantee a certain profit with the state “1” of BB, the batting order notification relating to the “push order bell” is not performed, and the “1500” game is not stayed. In both cases, the “advantage period” can be ended at the end of BB.

  For the normal state shown in FIG. 9B (at the time of winning the special small role), when one of the winning numbers “08” to “11” is won, the “normal state” is “normal state”. It is a table for determining whether or not to shift to either “high probability state”, “chance state”, or “ART ready state” that is an “advantageous period”. That is, if the winning number “08” is “Watermelon”, “24/256” wins the transition to the “high probability state”, and “12/256” wins the transition to the “chance state”. Then, “2/256” wins the transition to the “ART ready state”, and “218/256” results in “losing” without transitioning to any state. Next, if the winning number is “09” “weak cherry”, “24/256” wins the transition to the “high probability state” and “12/256” shifts to the “chance state” Is won, “2/256” is won to shift to the “ART ready state”, and “218/256” is “lost” which does not shift to any state. Next, if the winning number is “10” and “strong cherry”, “64/256” wins the transition to the “high probability state” and “32/256” shifts to the “chance state” Is won, “12/256” is won to shift to the “ART ready state”, and “148/256” is “lost” without changing to any state. Next, if the winning number “11” is “chance role”, “64/256” wins the transition to “high probability state”, and “32/256” shifts to “chance state” Is won, “12/256” is won to shift to the “ART ready state”, and “148/256” is “lost” without changing to any state. In other words, the “strong” of the winning number “10”, which is harder to be determined as the winning combination, than the “watermelon” of the winning number “08” or the “weak cherry” of the winning number “09”. The lottery value is set so that it is easier to shift to the “advantage period” when winning “Cherry” or “chance combination” of the winning number “11”. Note that a transition destination that is easy to transition may be provided depending on the winning combination. For example, if the winning number is “08” “watermelon”, a lottery value may be set so as to facilitate the transition to the “high probability state”, or if the winning number “09” is “weak cherry”. The lottery value may be set so as to make it easier to shift to the “chance state”, or “ART” if the winning number “10” is “strong cherry” or the winning number “11” is “chance role”. A lottery value may be set so as to facilitate the transition to the “preparation state”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the winning combination shown in FIG. 9B is a winning combination with no difference in the lottery value depending on the set value. A winning combination with a difference in value may be provided. For example, “Watermelon” with a winning number “08” is set as “Watermelon A”, and separately from this, “Watermelon B” having a difference in the lottery value is provided by a setting value constituted by another winning number, In “A”, the transfer lottery to the “advantage period” is performed using the table of FIG. 9B, whereas in “Watermelon B”, the transfer lottery to the “advantage period” using the table of FIG. 9B is performed. It may not be performed. If both “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” are configured to stop on a common effective line (for example, “downward line to the right”), the symbol related to “watermelon” displayed on the effective line is displayed. From the combination, it becomes difficult to grasp which of “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is won. In such a case, the higher the set value is, the more frequently the combination of symbols related to “watermelon” is displayed on the active line, while the symbol combination related to “watermelon” is “ Since an event with a low frequency of transition to the “advantage period” can occur, it can be used as a judgment material for predicting which setting value is set as a setting value from such an event, and can improve amusement entertainment it can. Note that the values shown in FIG. 9B may be arbitrarily changed.

(ART related lottery table)
Next, the ART related lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART related lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302.

  The ART-related lottery table includes an ART transition lottery table (for normal bonus state) shown in FIG. 10 (A) and an ART extra lottery table (normal bonus state / ART preparation state / ART state) shown in FIG. 10 (B). And the bonus state during ART). In the ART transition lottery table shown in FIG. 10A, the BB is won in the normal bonus state, that is, in the “normal state”, and when the BB is won, the BB operation is set as the “advantage period”. It is a table used during BB operation | movement when it determines. Therefore, the table is not used when the BB operation is “normal period”. Further, the ART addition lottery table shown in FIG. 10B shows the “after the BB is won in the“ normal state ”and the transition to the“ ART state ”is confirmed during the BB operation which is the“ favorable period ”. A table used when the lottery of the number of games in the “ART state” is performed, and a table used when the lottery of the number of games in the “ART state” is added in the “ART ready state”; , A table used when the number of games in the “ART state” is added in the “ART state” and a lottery is performed, and in the “ART state”, a BB other than the “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” is displayed. It is a table used when a lottery is made by adding the number of games in the “ART state” during the winning BB operation.

  In the ART transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 10 (A), if the winning number is “08” “watermelon”, “6/256” wins the transfer lottery to “ART state”, and “250/256” The lottery for shifting to the “ART state” is not won. Next, if the winning number is “09”, “weak cherry”, “6/256” will win the transition to “ART state” and “250/256” will shift to the “ART state”. Will not be elected. Next, if the winning number is “10” and “strong cherry”, “24/256” will win the transition to “ART state” and “232/256” will shift to the “ART state”. Will not be elected. Next, if the winning number “11” is “chance role”, “24/256” will win the transition to “ART state” and “232/256” will shift to the “ART state”. Will not be elected. As described in the description of FIG. 9B, a winning combination having a setting difference may be provided (however, a lottery for shifting to the “ART state” using a winning combination having a setting difference is not performed). The lottery value shown in FIG. 10 (A) may be arbitrarily changed.

  In the ART addition lottery table shown in FIG. 10B, if the winning number is “08” and “watermelon”, it is decided to add “10” games to “ART state” with “64/256”. In “24/256”, it is determined that “20” games will be added to the number of “ART state” games, and “50” games will be added to “ART state” in “2/256”. And “166/256” becomes “lost”. It is not determined that the “100” game is added. Next, in the case of “weak cherry” with the winning number “09”, it is decided to add “10” games to the number of “ART state” games by “64/256”, and “24/256” It is determined that the number of games in the “ART state” is increased by “20” games, and the number of games in the “ART state” is determined to be increased by “50” games by “2/256”, and “166/256” is determined. It becomes "losing". It is not determined that the “100” game is added. Next, if the winning number is “10” “strong cherry”, “128/256” is determined to add the number of “ART state” games to “10” games, and “92/256” It is determined that the number of games in the “ART state” is increased by “20” games, and the number of games in the “ART state” is determined to be increased by “50” games by “24/256”, and “12/256”. Then, it is determined that the number of games in the “ART state” is added to “100” games. Next, if the winning number “11” is “chance role”, it is decided to add “10” games to the number of “ART state” games by “128/256”, and “92/256” It is determined that the number of games in the “ART state” is increased by “20” games, and the number of games in the “ART state” is determined to be increased by “50” games by “24/256”, and “12/256”. Then, it is determined that the number of games in the “ART state” is added to “100” games. In addition, as described in the explanation of FIG. 9B, a winning combination with a setting difference may be provided (however, a lottery with the number of “ART state” games using a winning combination having a setting difference is not performed. ), The lottery value shown in FIG. 10B may be arbitrarily changed.

(Lottery table for high probability state)
Next, the lottery table for the high probability state will be described with reference to FIG. The high probability state lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302.

  The high probability state lottery table includes an ART shift lottery table shown in FIG. 11A and a fall lottery table shown in FIG. Each table is a table used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “high probability state”, and the ART transition lottery table shown in FIG. 11 is a table for performing a lottery for shifting to the “ART ready state” at the time of winning the special small role, and the falling lottery table shown in FIG. It is a table for performing a lottery to shift to a “normal state” when “normal replay” is won.

  In the ART transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 11 (A), if the winning number is “08” “watermelon”, “18/256” will win the transfer lottery to “ART ready state” and “238/256”. The winning lottery to “ART ready state” will not be won. Next, if the winning number “09” is “Weak Cherry”, “18/256” will shift to “ART ready state”, and “238/256” will shift to “ART ready state”. The lottery is not won. Next, if the winning number is “10” and “strong cherry”, “72/256” makes a transition to “ART ready state”, and “184/256” makes a transition to “ART ready state”. The lottery is not won. Next, if the winning number is “11” and “chance combination”, “72/256” will shift to “ART ready state”, and “184/256” will shift to “ART ready state”. The lottery is not won. Note that the lottery value to be shifted to the “ART ready state” at the time of winning the special small role in the “high probability state” is “ART ready” at the time of winning the special small role in the “normal state” shown in FIG. Since it is higher than the lottery value that will shift to “state”, the player in the “high probability state” is more advantageous than the “normal state”. As described in the description of FIG. 9B, a winning combination having a setting difference may be provided (however, a lottery for shifting to the “ART ready state” using a winning combination having a setting difference is not performed. ), The lottery value shown in FIG. 11A may be arbitrarily changed.

  In the falling lottery table shown in FIG. 11 (B), it is decided to shift (fall) to “normal state” at “32/256” at the time of “normal replay” winning of the winning number “01”, and “224/256”. To maintain the “high probability state”. As described in the explanation of FIG. 9B, a winning combination having a setting difference may be provided (however, a lottery to the “normal state” using a winning combination having a setting difference is not performed). The lottery value shown in FIG. 11B may be arbitrarily changed. Further, in the falling lottery table shown in FIG. 11B, “normal replay” of the winning number “01” was used as a falling opportunity, but “first push order bell” to winning number “12” of the winning number “12”. Any or all of the “5th push order bells” of “16” can be used as a fall trigger.

(Chance state lottery table)
Next, the chance state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The chance state lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302.

  The chance state lottery table is a table used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “chance state”. In the “chance state”, according to the winning combination, the “ART ready state” It is a table for performing transfer lottery to.

  As described above, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “chance state”, since it corresponds to the “first RT gaming state”, as shown in FIG. 6, the winning number “01” to the winning number You can win all 31 winning roles. Of these, winning the BB excluding “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” wins “256/256” in the “ART ready state”, so the BB winning in the “chance state” (winning) The number “19” (excluding “Black Seven BB”) will shift to the “ART ready state” after the end of the BB. Note that “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” is not selected with “256/256” in the “ART ready state”. That is, the “Black Seven BB” winning of the winning number “19” when in the “chance state” is shifted to the “normal state” after the end of the BB. As a result, for example, the higher the set value, the more likely it is to shift to the “ART ready state” triggered by the winning of “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19”. Preventing feelings of fairness and inequality. In addition, other winning roles except BB may be elected to “ART ready status” or unselected to “ART ready status”, “strong cherry” with winning number “10”, or elected A lottery value is set for the “chance combination” with the number “11” so that it is easier to win the “ART ready state” than other winning combinations. As described in the description of FIG. 9B, a winning combination having a setting difference may be provided (however, a lottery for shifting to the “ART ready state” using a winning combination having a setting difference is not performed. ), The lottery value shown in FIG. 12 may be arbitrarily changed. In addition, “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” in the “chance state” has been transferred to the “normal state” after the end of the BB, but as with other BBs, the BB ends. You may shift to the “ART ready state” later.

(Lottery table for precursor status)
Next, the sign state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The sign state lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302.

  The sign state lottery table is a table used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is set to the “predictor state”, and the number of games in the “predictor state” until the transition to the “chance state”. Or a table for determining the number of games until the transition to the “ART ready state”.

  As described above, when the “chance state” or the “ART ready state” is won in the “normal state”, the state is once shifted to the “predictor state”, and after passing through the “predictor state”, the “chance state” or “ART It will shift to "Ready state". The number of games in the “precursor state” is determined from a plurality of different game numbers so that the number of games in the “precursor state” is not patterned. That is, when “chance state” is won in “normal state”, the number of “4” games “predictive state” is determined by “1/256”, and “16” games are determined by “64/256”. The number of “predictive state” games is determined, “64/256” is the number of “24” games “predictive state”, and “127/256” is “32” games “predictive state”. Determine the number of games. In addition, when “ART ready state” is won in “normal state”, the number of “predictive state” of “4” game is determined by “2/256” and “16” is determined by “62/256”. The number of games in the “predictive state” of the game is determined, the number of “predictive state” in the “24” game is determined in “62/256”, and the “predictive state” in the “32” game in “130/256” Determine the number of games. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, since the “predictor state” is shifted to the “chance state” or the “ART ready state”, the liquid crystal display is displayed in the “predictor state”. The effect performed by the device 31 or the like is, for example, a roulette effect that gives either “chance state” or “ART ready state” or an effect that confronts an enemy character. If the character wins, the transition to the “ART ready state” is notified, and if it is drawn with the enemy character, the transition to the “chance state” is notified. When the number of games in the “predictive state” is “16” or more, the roulette effect described above is executed after performing a roaring effect encouraging the transition to the “chance state” or the “ART ready state”. Or a confrontation effect may be executed. In the “precursor state”, an effect that is easy to execute when the transition to the “chance state” is determined, and an effect that is easy to execute when the transition to the “ART ready state” is determined. , It may be possible to give the player a chance to predict which state will be entered. On the other hand, even if the transition to the “chance state” is determined or the transition to the “ART ready state” is determined, the “prediction state” The player may not be able to predict which state will be given until the end. In addition, you may change arbitrarily the lottery value shown in FIG.

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The program start process is a process performed based on the fact that the power switch 201sw is turned on. In the following description of the flowcharts, in the “lottery process” and “decision process”, random numbers are extracted from the main random number generator 304, and “lottery” and “decision” are extracted using the extracted random number values and a table. Is configured to perform. In the following description of the flowchart, the case where the above-mentioned “ART added state” is not provided will be described. In other words, after the “art BB state during ART” is completed, the state shifts to the “ART ready state”.

(Step S1)
In step S <b> 1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not power is interrupted. Specifically, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a power interruption state, and when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the gaming machine 1 is cut off by the backup power source is performed. If it is determined that the power is interrupted (step S1 = Yes), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not interrupted (step S1 = No), the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs a process of setting the register address based on the table. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change keyhole. If it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S4, and if it is determined that the setting change key switch is not ON (step S3). = No), the processing shifts to a power failure recovery process for restoring the value of the register saved before power interruption and the value of the saved stack pointer. When the power interruption recovery process is completed, the game machine 1 returns to the state when the power is turned off.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first acquires the current setting value based on the value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether the setting value range is normal. If the result of the determination is normal, the current setting value is displayed on a setting display section (not shown). On the other hand, when the above-described determination result is not normal, processing for setting the initial value of the setting value in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process of switching the set value based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button (not shown) by the setting change switch (not shown), and the start lever 10 by the start switch 10sw. Based on the detected operation, a process for determining the set value is performed. Then, the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the key hole for setting change, and has been turned a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction from the state rotated in the clockwise direction by a predetermined angle. When it is detected, processing for storing the set value in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S4 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 15).

(Main loop processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the main loop process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stack pointer, sets the initialization start address and the initialization end address of the main RAM 303, and then initializes from the initialization start address to the initialization end address area of the main RAM 303. Processing for initializing the area is performed. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the press reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Note that the area to be cleared in this process is an area different from an area for storing information related to a period managed by the main control board 300 (a “period management area” described later). Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs medal acceptance start processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when a later-described re-game operation flag is ON. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when a later-described re-game operation flag is not ON, and when the medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. In addition, a process for adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303, whether or not an operation of the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is detected, and the operation of the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 are determined. Is detected, the process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Further, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, and when an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, a process of returning the stored medal to the player is performed. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S <b> 104, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 has become “3” by the medal acceptance start process in step S102 and the medal management process in step S103. Process. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S104 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105, where it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3”. In this case (step S104 = No), the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an operation of the start lever is detected by the start switch 10sw, and is provided in the main RAM 303 when the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. Processing for turning off the re-game operating flag in the re-game operating flag storage area is performed. On the other hand, when the operation of the start lever 10 is not detected by the start switch 10sw, the start lever check process is terminated. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. When it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107. When it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S106 = No), The process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning combination by lottery. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus information update process. Specifically, when the bonus is won by the internal lottery process in step S107, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and is provided in the main RAM 303. A process for setting information related to the “third RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area is performed. On the other hand, if the bonus is not won by the internal lottery process in step S107, the value stored in the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 are displayed. Is performed, and the result of the calculation is stored in a winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108 ends, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs a start-time state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the state managed by the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs information setting processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a conditional device command corresponding to the winning combination, a process for determining instruction information corresponding to the state, and a process for setting an instruction information command. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs a start time period management process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, if the small payout of the maximum payout number has been notified, the main CPU 301 manages the process of turning on the notified flag, the process of subtracting the advantageous period counter, and the advantageous period counter is not being set. If the period to be executed is not the “standby period”, the management period is set to “normal period”, or the advantageous period counter is being set and the advantageous period counter value is “0”. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the normal state when the process to be performed is the “normal period” or when the value of the advantageous period counter is not “0”, the “normal period” And the like. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation start preparation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing the spinning effect based on information stored in the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed as a result of the determination, the minimum game time has elapsed in the next game. In order to determine whether or not it has been performed, a process of setting a value of a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed, the main CPU 301 performs a process of waiting until the minimum game time has elapsed. In addition, the main CPU 301 transmits the reel rotation start command having information indicating that the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started to the sub control board 400. Is set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to determine the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Performs processing to rotate at high speed. Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs processing during reel rotation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed, and the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed. In the case of pressing, among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 and the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the operated stop button. Then, based on the values of the pulse counters supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, the pressing reference position is acquired and stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Next, the main CPU 301 has a stop table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the value of the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop. Based on the operation order of the button 13, etc., a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” to “4” frames is performed, and the determined number of sliding frames is determined as a sliding frame provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the number storage area. The main CPU 301 rotates based on the value stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value stored in the sliding frame number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. A process of stopping the middle left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not all reels have stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are all stopped by the reel rotation process in step S114. If it is determined that all the reels are stopped (step S115 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116. If it is determined that all the reels are not stopped (step S115 = No), The process proceeds to step S114, and the same process is repeated until all reels stop.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sends the display determination command to the main RAM 303 in order to transmit a display determination command having information on the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line to the sub-control board 400. Is set in the production transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line, and determines that “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. In the case of a game, a process for calculating the number of medals to be paid out to the player is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to winning” is not displayed on the active line, a process is performed to determine whether or not the “combination of symbols related to replay” is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to replay” is displayed on the active line, a process of turning on the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S117.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs medal payout processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of paying out medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 based on the fact that “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. Do. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S118.

(Step S118)
In step S118, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S118 ends, the process proceeds to step S119.

(Step S119)
In step S119, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to display state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the combination of the state managed by the main control board 300 and the symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S119 ends, the process proceeds to step S120.

(Step S120)
In step S120, the main CPU 301 performs a display time period management process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets “1500” in the advantageous period counter when the process of setting the “waiting period” as the management period when the standby period transition flag is ON, or when the advantageous period transition flag is ON. ”, Processing for setting“ normal period ”as the management period when the standby period transition flag is not ON, the advantageous period transition flag is not ON, and the management period is not“ standby period ”, etc. I do. Then, when the process of step S120 ends, the process proceeds to step S101.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 15 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the internal lottery process.

(Step S107-1)
In step S107-1, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S107-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-2.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number initial value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an initial value of a winning number when determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring “31” as the initial value of the winning number and storing it in the register. Then, when the process of step S107-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-3.

(Step S107-3)
In step S107-3, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-4.

(Step S107-4)
In step S107-4, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination determination table setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a winning combination determination table provided in the main ROM 302 based on information related to the gaming state acquired in the gaming state acquisition process of step S107-3. Then, when the process of step S107-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-5.

(Step S107-5)
In step S107-5, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the winning combination corresponding to the winning number based on the winning combination determination table set by the winning combination determination table setting process in step S107-4 and the winning number stored in the register. The process which acquires the data concerned is performed. Then, when the process of step S107-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-6.

(Step S107-6)
In step S107-6, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the winning combination determination table currently set based on the value stored in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the winning number stored in the register. A lottery value is acquired and stored in a register. Then, when the process of step S107-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-7.

(Step S107-7)
In step S107-7, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process in step S107-6 from the random number value stored in the register, and subtracts the value of the register in which the random number value is stored. The process of updating to the value after storage and storing it is performed. Then, when the process of step S107-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-8.

(Step S107-8)
In step S107-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process of step S107-6 from the random value stored in the register by the lottery confirmation process of step S107-7. Then, a process for determining whether or not the value is negative is performed. If it is determined that the winning combination is made (step S107-8 = Yes), the winning combination is determined based on the winning number stored in the register, and then the internal lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S107-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S107-9.

(Step S107-9)
In step S107-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S107-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-10.

(Step S107-10)
In step S107-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the winning number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning number is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the winning number value stored in the register by the process of step S107-9. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the winning number is “0” (step S107-10 = Yes), after “losing” is determined as the winning combination, the internal lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop The process proceeds to step S108 of the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning number is not “0” (step S107-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S107-3.

(Processing by status at start)
Next, based on FIG. 17, a description will be given of the start-time state process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the state processing at the start time.

(Step S109-1)
In step S <b> 109-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal state” is based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “normal state” (step S109-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-2. If it is determined that the state is not “normal state” (step S109). -1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-3.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs normal state processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal carryover state” when BB is won, and shifts to an advantageous period when the BB is not won. It is determined whether the winning combination is won, and when the winning combination related to the advantageous period transition is elected, the advantageous period transition determining process is performed, and as a result of performing the process, it is determined to shift to the advantageous period. If this happens, the advantageous period transition flag is turned ON. When the “high probability state” is won, the state managed by the main control board 300 is transferred to the “high probability state”, and when the “chance state” is won, the main When the state managed by the control board 300 is shifted to the “precursor state” and the “ART ready state” is selected, the state managed by the main control board 300 is shifted to the “precursor state”. Perform processing. Then, when the process of step S109-2 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal carryover state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal carryover state” is based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “normal carryover state” (step S109-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4, and if it is determined that it is not “normal carryover state” ( Step S109-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs normal carryover state processing. In the normal carryover state, the main CPU 301 determines that the left stop button is selected when, for example, “first push order bell” with the winning number “12” to “5th push order bell” with the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination. 11. An instruction information (none) command, which will be described later, that does not specify the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is set. When the command is set, the operation sequence related to the “first push order bell” of the winning number “12” to the “fifth push order bell” of the winning number “16” causes the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like to change. Will not be notified. Further, in the normal carryover state, the main CPU 301 determines that “watermelon” having the winning number “08”, “weak cherry” having the winning number “09”, “strong cherry” having the winning number “10”, and “11” having the winning number “11”. When the “chance combination” is determined as the winning combination, the advantageous period transition determination process is not performed. As a result, for example, in the advantageous period transition determination process using the table of FIG. 9A at the time of winning the BB, if the transition to the advantageous period is not won, the normal period remains in the normal carryover state. Therefore, there is no transition to the advantageous period. When the process of step S109-4 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-5)
In step S109-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal bonus state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal bonus state” is based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “normal bonus state” is set (step S109-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-6, and if it is determined that the “normal bonus state” is not set. (Step S109-5 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-7.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs a normal bonus state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that the main CPU 301 is in the BB when the winning number “19” is not “Black Seven BB” and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantage period”. Based on the ART transfer lottery table (for normal bonus state) in FIG. 10A provided in the ROM 302, an ART transfer lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the “ART state” after the end of BB. Further, when it is already determined to shift to the “ART state”, an ART extra lottery process for adding the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is performed. On the other hand, if the winning number “19” is “Black Seven BB” or the period managed by the main control board 300 is not the “advantage period” but the “normal period”, the ART transfer lottery Etc. are not performed. In step S109-6-1, in order to recognize that the winning number “19” is “Black Seven BB”, for example, in the information setting process of FIG. It is assumed as a means to set a flag or the like that can recognize that “Black Seven BB” is won and hold it until the end of BB. Then, when the process of step S109-6 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-7)
In step S <b> 109-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not it is in the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is in the “ART ready state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “ART ready state” (step S109-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-8, and if it is determined that the state is not “ART ready state” ( Step S109-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-9.

(Step S109-8)
In step S109-8, the main CPU 301 performs an ART preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the main CPU 301 wins BB, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART carry-over state” or the winning combination is “special small role”. , ART for adding the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the ART addition lottery table (common bonus state / ART preparation state / ART state / ART bonus state during ART) of FIG. 10 (B) Add lottery processing. Then, when the process of step S109-8 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “ART state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is the “ART state” (step S109-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-10, and if it is determined that the state is not the “ART state” (step S109). −9 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs ART state processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the main CPU 301 wins BB, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART carryover state” and stops the subtraction of the ART state game number counter, When the ART state game number counter provided in the RAM 303 is set to “−1” or the winning combination is “special small role”, the ART extra lottery table (normal bonus state / Based on the ART ready state / ART state / ART bonus state), an ART extra lottery process for adding the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”, or an ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 When “0” is “0”, a process of shifting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-10 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-11)
In step S <b> 109-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is “the carry-over state during ART”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is “the carry-over state during ART” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “the carry-over state during ART” (step S109-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-12, and if it is determined that the state is not “the carry-over state during ART”. (Step S109-11 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-13.

(Step S109-12)
In step S109-12, the main CPU 301 performs an ART carryover state process. In the carry-over state processing during ART, for example, when the main CPU 301 determines, as the winning combination, “first push order bell” of the winning number “12” to “5th push order bell” of the winning number “16”. An instruction information (present) command, which will be described later, is set to specify the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13. When the command is set, the operation sequence related to the “first push order bell” of the winning number “12” to the “fifth push order bell” of the winning number “16” causes the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like to change. To be notified. Similarly, in the “ART state”, the operation order related to “first push order bell” with the winning number “12” to “5th push order bell” with the winning number “16” is the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like. Therefore, even if the BB is won in the “ART state” and the “carry-on state during ART” is shifted to, the “first push order bell” to the winning number “16” of the winning number “12” will continue. ”Is the state in which the operation order related to“ 5th push order bell ”is informed via the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like, so that the operation order is not notified suddenly, so that BB is won. It can be prevented from being detected by the player. In the carry-over state during ART, the main CPU 301 sets the “watermelon” with the winning number “08”, the “weak cherry” with the winning number “09”, the “strong cherry” with the winning number “10”, and the winning number “11”. When the “chance combination” is determined as the winning combination, for example, the ART addition lottery process for adding the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is not performed. Then, when the process of step S109-12 is completed, the subroutine of the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-13)
In step S <b> 109-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is in the “art bonus state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “bonus state during ART” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is the “bonus state during ART” (step S109-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-14, and if it is determined that the state is not the “bonus state during ART”. (Step S109-13 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-15.

(Step S109-14)
In step S109-14, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus state process during ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 determines that the ART addition lottery table (normal bonus state / ART preparation state / ART state) shown in FIG. Based on the bonus state during ART), an ART extra lottery process for adding the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-14 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-15)
In step S109-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “high probability state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is a “high probability state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “high probability state” (step S109-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16, and if it is determined that the state is not “high probability state” ( Step S109-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-17.

(Step S109-16)
In step S109-16, the main CPU 301 performs a high-probability state process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, when the main CPU 301 wins BB, if the winning number is “19” and “Black Seven BB”, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal carryover state”. 11, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is shifted to the “ART carry-over state” or the winning combination is “special small role”, the ART of FIG. Based on the transfer lottery table, when the ART transfer lottery process for shifting from the “high probability state” to the “ART state” or when the winning combination is “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, FIG. Based on the falling lottery table of B), a falling lottery process for shifting from the “high probability state” to the “normal state” is performed. When the process of step S109-16 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-17)
In step S <b> 109-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “precursor state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “precursor state” is based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “precursor state” (step S109-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-18, and if it is determined that the state is not “precursor state” (step S109). −17 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-19.

(Step S109-18)
In step S109-18, the main CPU 301 performs a precursor state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 determines whether the number of precursor games in the “chance state”, the processing of determining the number of precursor games in the “ART state”, or the number-of-game counters for precursor state has been set. When the sign state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “−1” or when the sign state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, the ART ready state winning flag is ON. If there is, the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to “ART ready state”, and if the ART ready state winning flag is not ON, the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to “chance state”. Perform processing. Then, when the process of step S109-18 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-19)
In step S109-19, the main CPU 301 performs a chance state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, when the main CPU 301 wins BB, if it is “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19”, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal carryover state”. If the BB is other than BB, the process managed by the main control board 300 is shifted to the “carry-on state during ART”, or when the winning combination is other than BB, based on the chance state lottery table of FIG. Then, an ART shift lottery process for shifting from the “chance state” to the “ART state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-18 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Normal processing)
Next, based on FIG. 18, the normal state process performed by the process of step S109-2 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S109-2-1)
In step S109-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the winning combination is BB (step S109-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-2-2, and when it is determined that the winning combination is not BB. (Step S109-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-2-7.

(Step S109-2-2)
In step S109-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal carryover state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal carryover state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-3.

(Step S109-2-3)
In step S109-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “19”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the winning combination is “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” in the BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is “19” (step S109-2-3 = Yes), the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing, where the winning number is determined. If it is determined that the number is not “19” (step S109-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-2-4.

(Step S109-2-4)
In step S109-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs an advantageous period transition determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs the transition determination process to the advantageous period triggered by the BB winning based on the (A) normal state (when BB winning) table of the advantageous period transition determining table shown in FIG. Do. Then, when step S109-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-5.

(Step S109-2-5)
In step S109-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the advantageous period as a result of performing the advantageous period transition determination process in step S109-2-4. And when it determines with having decided to transfer to an advantageous period (step S109-2-5 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S109-2-6 and it is determined to transfer to an advantageous period. If it is determined that there is not (step S109-2-5 = No), the subroutine for the normal state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-2-6)
In step S109-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the standby period transition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the standby period transition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the standby period transition flag is a flag for recognizing that the transition condition from the “normal period” to the “standby period” is satisfied. In the display period management process of FIG. If the standby period shift flag is ON, a process of shifting from the “normal period” to the “standby period” is performed. Further, in the display normal carry-over state process shown in FIG. 30 described later, if it is determined that the bonus symbol is displayed, if the standby period shift flag is ON, a process of setting the advantageous period shift flag described later to ON is performed. Do. If the advantageous period transition flag is ON, a process of shifting from the “standby period” to the “advantage period” is performed in the display time period management process of FIG. When the process of step S109-2-6 ends, the normal state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-2-7)
In step S109-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is a winning combination related to the advantageous period transition. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is the winning combination related to the advantageous period transition based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. Here, the winning combination relating to the advantageous period transition is “watermelon” with winning number “08”, “weak cherry” with winning number “09”, “strong cherry” with winning number “10”, winning number “11” Corresponds to “chance role”. If it is determined that the winning combination is related to the advantageous period transition (step S109-2-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-2-8, and the winning combination is not related to the advantageous period transition. If it is determined (step S109-2-7 = No), the subroutine for the normal state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-2-8)
In step S109-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs an advantageous period transition determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the advantageous period triggered by the special small role winning based on the (B) normal state (when special special role winning) table of the advantageous period transition determination table shown in FIG. Perform migration decision processing. In performing the advantageous period transition determination process, a random number value is extracted from the main random number generator 304, and the extracted random number value is used for (B) normal state (special) in the advantageous period transition determination table shown in FIG. In the small role winning) table, processing is performed such as determining whether any state (high probability state, chance state, ART ready state) is a random number value to be won. Then, when the process of step S109-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-9.

(Step S109-2-9)
In step S109-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous period. Specifically, in step S109-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the advantageous period as a result of performing the advantageous period transition determination process. And when it determines with having decided to transfer to an advantageous period (step S109-2-9 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S109-2-10 and it is determined to transfer to an advantageous period. When it is determined that there is not (step S109-2-9 = No), the subroutine for the normal state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-2-10)
In step S109-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the advantageous period transition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the advantageous period transition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the advantageous period transition flag is a flag for recognizing that the transition condition from the “normal period” or the “standby period” to the “advantage period” is satisfied. In the period management process, if the advantageous period shift flag is ON, a process of shifting from the “normal period” or “standby period” to the “advantage period” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-2-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-11.

(Step S109-2-11)
In step S109-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the migration destination is in a high probability state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs an advantageous period transition determination process in step S109-2-8, and determines that the transition to the advantageous period is determined in step S109-2-9. To determine whether or not is in a high probability state. And when it determines with a transfer destination being a high probability state (step S109-2-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-2-12, and determined with the transfer destination not being a high probability state. In this case (step S109-2-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-2-13.

(Step S109-2-12)
In step S109-2-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the high probability state transition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the high probability state transition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the “high probability state transition flag” is a flag for recognizing the transition of the state to the high probability state, and is the processing in step S119-12 of the display state state processing of FIG. 29 described later. Will be reflected. When the process of step S109-2-12 ends, the normal state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-2-13)
In step S109-2-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the migration destination is in the chance state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs an advantageous period transition determination process in step S109-2-8, and determines that the transition to the advantageous period is determined in step S109-2-9. A process of determining whether or not is in a chance state. If it is determined that the transfer destination is in the chance state (step S109-2-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-2-14, and it is determined that the transfer destination is not in the chance state. (Step S109-2-13 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-2-17.

(Step S109-2-14)
In step S109-2-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the chance state winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the chance state winning flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the chance state winning flag is a flag for recognizing that the condition for shifting to the chance state is satisfied. In the precursor state process shown in FIG. When it becomes “0”, the state is shifted from the precursor state to the chance state. In other words, even if the chance state is won, the state is once shifted to the precursor state and then transferred to the chance state through the precursor state. Therefore, the flag is necessary until the chance state is shifted to the chance state. Then, when the process of step S109-2-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-15.

(Step S109-2-15)
In step S109-2-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the chance state precursor counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the chance state precursor counter flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the chance state precursor counter flag is a flag for determining the number of games in the precursor state from winning of the chance state to shifting to the chance state. In the precursor state process of FIG. If the chance state precursor counter flag is ON, the number of precursor games is determined with reference to the number of chance state precursor games in the precursor state lottery table shown in FIG. Then, when the process of step S109-2-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-16.

(Step S109-2-16)
In step S109-2-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the state to a precursor state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting information related to the “precursor state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-2-16 ends, the normal state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-2-17)
In step S109-2-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART preparation state winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART ready state winning flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the ART ready state winning flag is a flag for recognizing that the condition for shifting to the ART ready state is satisfied. In the precursor state process shown in FIG. When the counter reaches “0”, the state is shifted from the precursor state to the ART ready state. In other words, even if the ART ready state is won, the flag is necessary until the state is shifted to the ART ready state through the precursor state and then the ART ready state after the ART state is won. It becomes. Then, when the process of step S109-2-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-18.

(Step S109-2-18)
In step S109-2-18, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART ready state precursor counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART ready state precursor counter flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the ART ready state precursor counter flag is a flag for determining the number of games in the precursor state from winning of the ART ready state to shifting to the ART ready state, and for the precursor state of FIG. 24 described later. In the processing, if the ART ready state precursor counter flag is ON, the number of precursor games is determined with reference to the number of ART ready state games in the precursor state lottery table shown in FIG. Become. Then, when the process of step S109-2-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-19.

(Step S109-2-19)
In step S109-2-19, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the state to a precursor state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting information related to the “precursor state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-2-19 ends, the normal state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Normal bonus state processing)
Next, the normal bonus state process performed by the process of step S109-6 of FIG. 17 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the normal bonus state process.

(Step S109-6-1)
In step S109-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the recognition flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the recognition flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the recognition flag is a flag that is turned ON when it is determined that “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” is won in the information setting process of FIG. No. 19 "Black Seven BB" triggered during normal bonus state processing, and "Black Seven BB" winning number "19" winning bonus processing during ART (described below) In FIG. 22), there is a flag for not performing the lottery process for shifting to the ART state or the extra lottery process in the ART state. In other words, “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” having a difference in the lottery value depending on the set value is selected in the normal state, in the ART state, or in the BB state. By not performing the process or the extra lottery process in the ART state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unfair or unequal by the set value. If it is determined that the recognition flag is ON (step S109-6-1 = Yes), the normal bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing. If it is determined that the flag is not ON (step S109-6-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-6-2.

(Step S109-6-2)
In step S <b> 109-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the management period is an advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information indicating an advantageous period is stored in the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. The main RAM 303 is provided with a period management area for managing the period managed by the main control board 300, which will be described in detail using a start period management process in FIG. Is stored. And when it determines with the period to manage being an advantageous period (step S109-6-2 = Yes), it shifted to processing to step S109-6-3, and determined with the period to manage not being an advantageous period. In this case (step S109-6-2 = No), the normal bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-6-3)
In step S109-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the ART winning flag is a flag for recognizing that the lottery for shifting to the ART state has been won, and the ART winning flag is ON in the display-time normal bonus state processing of FIG. If so, the state is shifted to the ART ready state after the bonus ends. When it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S109-6-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-6-7, and when it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON. (Step S109-6-3 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-6-4.

(Step S109-6-4)
In step S109-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs an ART shift lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 enters the ART state based on the (A) ART transition lottery table (for normal bonus state) of the ART-related lottery table of FIG. 10 and the winning combination (limited to special small roles). The transfer lottery process is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-6-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6-5.

(Step S109-6-5)
In step S109-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the lottery process for shifting to the ART state has been won as a result of performing the ART shift lottery process in step S109-6-4. If it is determined that the lottery process for shifting to the ART state has been won (step S109-6-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-6-6, and the lottery process for shifting to the ART state is won. If it is determined that it has not been performed (step S109-6-5 = No), the normal bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-6-6)
In step S109-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-6-6 ends, the normal bonus state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-6-7)
In step S109-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs ART addition lottery processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the (B) ART addition lottery table (common bonus state, ART ready state, ART state, and bonus state during ART) of the ART related lottery table in FIG. And the lottery process for adding an ART for adding the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S109-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6-8.

(Step S109-6-8)
In step S109-6-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, in step S109-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the addition of the number of games has been won as a result of performing the ART addition lottery process. If it is determined that the game number is won (step S109-6-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-6-9, and it is determined that the game number is not won. In this case (step S109-6-8 = No), the normal bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-6-9)
In step S109-6-9, the main CPU 301 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding the number of added games determined in step S109-6-7 to an ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the ART state game number counter is a counter that stores the number of games that can be played in the ART state. When a value (a value other than “0”) is set in the counter, If the state is playable and the counter is “0”, the ART state is not playable. When the process of step S109-6-9 ends, the normal bonus state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(ART preparation status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 20, the ART preparation state process performed by the process of step S109-8 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART preparation state process.

(Step S109-8-1)
In step S109-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the winning combination is BB (step S109-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-8-2, and when it is determined that the winning combination is not BB. (Step S109-8-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-8-3.

(Step S109-8-2)
In step S <b> 109-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART carry-over state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting information related to the “ART carryover state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S109-8-2 is completed, the ART preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-8-3)
In step S109-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the period to be managed is a normal period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information indicating a normal period is stored in the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. In the ART ready state, the situation in which the management period becomes the normal period is assumed to be, for example, when the “1500” game of the advantageous period is reached in the ART ready state. In other words, in the ART ready state, when the “1500” game of the advantageous period is reached, the ART ready state is maintained, but the ART ready state is handled in the normal period. The lottery that will be added to the ART will not be performed. If it is determined that the management period is the normal period (step S109-8-3 = Yes), the ART preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. If it is determined that the management period is not the normal period (step S109-8-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-8-4.

(Step S109-8-4)
In step S109-8-4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is a special small combination. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is a special small combination based on a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is a special small combination (step S109-8-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-8-5, and it is determined that the winning combination is not a special small combination. If YES (step S109-8-4 = No), the ART ready state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-8-5)
In step S109-8-5, the main CPU 301 performs ART addition lottery processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the (B) ART addition lottery table (common bonus state, ART ready state, ART state, and bonus state during ART) of the ART related lottery table in FIG. And the lottery process for adding an ART for adding the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S109-8-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-8-6.

(Step S109-8-6)
In step S109-8-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, in step S109-8-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the addition of the number of games is won as a result of performing the ART addition lottery process. If it is determined that the game number is won (step S109-8-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-8-7, and it is determined that the game number is not won. In this case (step S109-8-6 = No), the ART ready state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-8-7)
In step S109-8-7, the main CPU 301 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding the number of added games determined in step S109-8-5 to the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-8-7 ends, the ART preparation state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(ART status processing)
Next, the ART state process performed by the process of step S109-10 of FIG. 17 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a subroutine of ART state processing.

(Step S109-10-1)
In step S109-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the winning combination is BB (step S109-10-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-10-2, and when it is determined that the winning combination is not BB. (Step S109-10-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-10-4.

(Step S109-10-2)
In step S <b> 109-10-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART carry-over state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting information related to the “ART carryover state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-10-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10-3.

(Step S109-10-3)
In step S109-10-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for stopping subtraction of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of stopping subtraction of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when BB is won in the ART state and the carry-over state during ART is set. That is, in the carry-over state during ART, the ART state game number counter is not subtracted, and the value of the ART state game number counter when BB is won in the ART state is held. Then, the game counter for the ART state is subtracted from the game that has finished BB and has entered the ART state again. When the BB is won in the ART state and the carry-over state during the ART is made, subtraction of the ART state game number counter stops in the processing, but subtraction of the advantageous period counter described later in the advantageous period corresponding to the ART state. Does not stop. Therefore, an advantageous period counter, which will be described later, continues to be subtracted even in the carry-over state during ART. The value of the ART state game number counter is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 for each game. Therefore, the sub control board 400 recognizes that the subtraction of the ART state game number counter is stopped when the same value is received in successive games as the value of the ART state game number counter. it can. When the process of step S109-10-3 is completed, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

  Here, when the BB is won in the ART state and the carry-over state during the ART is made, the subtraction of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is stopped, but the ART state game number counter is stopped. In stopping the subtraction, it is not limited to the case where BB is won in the ART state and the carry-over state during the ART is set. For example, in the ART state, you may win a special small role and win a special small role to make a lottery transition to the ART extra state. In the transition lottery, you win the ART extra state and move to the ART extra state. In such a case, the subtraction of the ART state game number counter may be stopped. Of course, even in this case, the subtraction of a later-described advantageous period counter in the advantageous period corresponding to the ART state is configured not to stop.

(Step S109-10-4)
In step S109-10-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the ART state game number counter to “−1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “−1” on the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-10-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10-5.

(Step S109-10-5)
In step S109-10-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is a special small combination. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is a special small combination based on a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is a special small combination (step S109-10-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-10-6, and it is determined that the winning combination is not a special small combination. If it is determined (step S109-10-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-10-9.

(Step S109-10-6)
In step S109-10-6, the main CPU 301 performs ART addition lottery processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the (B) ART addition lottery table (common bonus state, ART ready state, ART state, and bonus state during ART) of the ART related lottery table in FIG. And the lottery process for adding an ART for adding the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S109-10-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10-7.

(Step S109-10-7)
In step S109-10-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, in step S109-10-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the addition of the number of games has been won as a result of performing the ART extra lottery process. If it is determined that the game number is won (step S109-10-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-10-8, and it is determined that the game number is not won. In this case (step S109-10-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-10-9.

(Step S109-10-8)
In step S109-10-8, the main CPU 301 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding the number of added games determined in step S109-10-6 to an ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-10-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10-9.

(Step S109-10-9)
In step S109-10-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S109-10-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-10-10, and the ART state game number counter is set. Is not “0” (step S109-10-9 = No), the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-10-10)
In step S109-10-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-10-10 ends, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Process for bonus status during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 22, the bonus state process during ART performed by the process of step S109-14 in FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the bonus state processing during ART.

(Step S109-14-1)
In step S109-14-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the recognition flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the recognition flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the recognition flag is ON (step S109-14-1 = Yes), the ART bonus state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. If it is determined that the flag is not ON (step S109-14-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-14-2.

(Step S109-14-2)
In step S109-14-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the management period is a normal period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information indicating a normal period is stored in the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. Note that the situation in which the management period is the normal period in the bonus state during ART is assumed, for example, when the “1500” game of the advantageous period is reached when in the bonus state during ART. That is, in the bonus state during ART, when the “1500” game of the advantageous period is reached, the bonus state during ART is maintained, but the bonus state during ART is treated as a normal period, so step S109-14-3 described later is performed. The subsequent ART addition lottery or the like will not be performed. If it is determined that the management period is the normal period (step S109-14-2 = Yes), the ART bonus process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. If it is determined that the management period is not the normal period (step S109-14-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-14-3.

(Step S109-14-3)
In step S109-14-3, the main CPU 301 performs ART addition lottery processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the (B) ART addition lottery table (common bonus state, ART ready state, ART state, and bonus state during ART) of the ART related lottery table in FIG. And the lottery process for adding an ART for adding the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S109-14-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14-4.

(Step S109-14-4)
In step S109-14-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, in step S109-14-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the addition of the number of games has been won as a result of performing the ART addition lottery process. If it is determined that the game number is won (step S109-14-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-14-5, and it is determined that the game number is not won. In this case (step S109-14-4 = No), the bonus state processing subroutine during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-14-5)
In step S109-14-5, the main CPU 301 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding the added game number determined in step S109-14-3 to the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-14-5 is completed, the subroutine for the bonus state during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(High probability state processing)
Next, the high-probability state process performed by the process of step S109-16 in FIG. 17 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a subroutine for high probability state processing.

(Step S109-16-1)
In step S109-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the winning combination is BB (step S109-16-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-2, and when it is determined that the winning combination is not BB. (Step S109-16-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-16-5.

(Step S109-16-2)
In step S109-16-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “19”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the winning combination is “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” in the BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is “19” (step S109-16-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-3, and it is determined that the winning number is not “19”. In that case (step S109-16-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-4.

(Step S109-16-3)
In step S109-16-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal carryover state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal carryover state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-3 ends, the high probability state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-16-4)
In step S <b> 109-16-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART carry-over state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting information related to the “ART carryover state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-4 is completed, the high probability state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-16-5)
In step S109-16-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is a special small combination. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is a special small combination based on a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is a special small combination (step S109-16-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-6, and it is determined that the winning combination is not a special small combination. If it is determined (step S109-16-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-10.

(Step S109-16-6)
In step S109-16-6, the main CPU 301 performs an ART shift lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs the transition lottery process to the ART state based on the (A) ART transition lottery table of the high-probability state lottery table in FIG. Do. Then, when the process of step S109-16-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-7.

(Step S109-16-7)
In step S109-16-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery process for shifting to the ART state is won as a result of performing the ART shift lottery process in step S109-16-6. If it is determined that the lottery process for shifting to the ART state has been won (step S109-16-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-8, and the lottery process for shifting to the ART state is won. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (step S109-16-7 = No), the high-probability state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-16-8)
In step S109-16-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART ready state precursor counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART ready state precursor counter flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-9.

(Step S109-16-9)
In step S109-16-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART ready state winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART ready state winning flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-9 ends, the high probability state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-16-10)
In step S109-16-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “01”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “normal replay” of the winning number “01” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is “01” (step S109-16-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-11, and it is determined that the winning number is not “01”. In this case (step S109-16-10 = No), the high probability state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-16-11)
In step S109-16-11, the main CPU 301 performs a falling lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a falling lottery process for shifting from the “high probability state” to the “normal state” based on the (B) falling lottery table of the high probability state lottery table of FIG. Then, when the process of step S109-16-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-12.

(Step S109-16-12)
In step S109-16-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has fallen. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the falling lottery process in step S109-16-11 is to shift (fall) from the “high probability state” to the “normal state”. Process. When it is determined that the vehicle has fallen (step S109-16-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-13. When it is determined that the vehicle has not fallen (step S109-16-12). = No), the high-probability state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-16-13)
In step S109-16-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-13 ends, the high probability state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Treatment for precursor status)
Next, based on FIG. 24, the precursor state process performed by the process of step S109-18 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the precursor state process.

(Step S109-18-1)
In step S109-18-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the precursor state game number counter has been set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of indication state games has been set in the indication state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the sign state game number counter is a counter for managing the number of games in the sign state, and is set in step S109-18-4 and step S109-18-7 described later. . Then, after the sign state game number counter is set, every time a “1” game is played, “1” is subtracted in step S109-18-15, which will be described later, and the sign state game number counter is set to “0”. Then, the state shifts from the precursor state to the chance state or the ART ready state. If it is determined that the precursor state game number counter has been set (step S109-18-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-18-9, and the precursor state game number counter is If it is determined that it has not been set (step S109-18-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-18-2.

(Step S109-18-2)
In step S109-18-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state precursor counter flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state precursor counter flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. The chance state precursor counter flag is a flag that is turned ON in step S109-2-15 in the normal state processing of FIG. If it is determined that the chance state precursor counter flag is ON (step S109-18-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-18-3, and the chance state precursor counter flag is not ON. Is determined (step S109-18-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-18-6.

(Step S109-18-3)
In step S109-18-3, the main CPU 301 performs a chance state precursor game number determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the chance state precursor game number in the precursor state lottery table of FIG. 13 and uses the chance state precursor game number of “4” game or the chance state of “16” game. The number of precursor games for chance state is determined from the number of precursor games, or the number of precursor games for chance state of “24” game, or the number of precursor games for chance state of “32” game. The sign state lottery table in FIG. 13 is configured to determine the number of predictor games based on the “chance state” win, but the winning combination that triggered the “chance state” win You may comprise so that the number of precursor games may be determined based on (for example, a special small part). Then, when the process of step S109-18-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18-4.

(Step S109-18-4)
In step S109-18-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the chance state precursor game number determined in step S109-18-3 in the precursor state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-18-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18-5.

(Step S109-18-5)
In step S109-18-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the chance state precursor counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the chance state precursor counter flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-18-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18-9.

(Step S109-18-6)
In step S109-18-6, the main CPU 301 performs the ART ready state precursor game number determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the ART ready state precursor game number in the precursor state lottery table in FIG. 13, and determines the number of “4” game ART ready state precursor games or the “16” game ART. The number of ART preparation state precursor games is determined from the number of preparation state precursor games, the number of “24” game ART preparation state precursor games, or the number of “32” game ART preparation state precursor games. Here, when it is determined that the chance state precursor counter flag in step S109-18-2 is not ON and the process proceeds to this processing, it is ON in step S109-2-18 of the normal state processing in FIG. In this case, the ART ready state precursor counter flag is ON. In the precursor state lottery table of FIG. 13, the number of precursor games is determined based on the winning of the “ART ready state”, but this is an opportunity to win the “ART ready state”. You may comprise so that the number of precursor games may be determined based on a winning combination (for example, special small combination). Then, when the process of step S109-18-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18-7.

  For example, in the process for the normal state in FIG. 18 of the “1” game, when the chance state is won based on the winning combination related to the advantageous period transition, the chance state precursor counter flag is turned ON, and the main control board The state managed by 300 is set as a precursor state (in the “1” game, the number of games in the precursor state is not determined). The number of games in the precursor state is determined based on the chance state precursor counter flag being ON in the precursor state process in the “2” game. Similarly, for example, in the normal state process of FIG. 18 of the “1” game, when the ART ready state is won based on the winning combination related to the advantageous period transition, the ART ready state precursor counter flag is turned ON. Thus, the state managed by the main control board 300 is set as the precursor state (in the “1” game, the number of games in the precursor state is not determined). The number of games in the precursor state is determined based on the fact that the ART ready state precursor counter flag is ON in the precursor state process in the “2” game. Therefore, in the “1” game, the type in the advantageous period (“chance state”, “ART ready state”) is determined, and in the “2” game, the type in the advantageous period determined in the “1” game. Is configured to determine the number of precursor games.

(Step S109-18-7)
In step S109-18-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the ART ready state precursor game number determined in step S109-18-6 in a precursor state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-18-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18-8.

(Step S109-18-8)
In step S109-18-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the ART ready state precursor counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the ART ready state precursor counter flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-18-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18-9.

(Step S109-18-9)
In step S109-18-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the winning combination is BB (step S109-18-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-18-10, and when it is determined that the winning combination is not BB. (Step S109-18-9 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-18-15.

(Step S109-18-10)
In step S109-18-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “19”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the winning combination is “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” in the BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. When it is determined that the winning number is “19” (step S109-18-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-18-11, and it is determined that the winning number is not “19”. In the case (step S109-18-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-18-14.

(Step S109-18-11)
In step S109-18-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the precursor state game number counter has been set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of indication state games has been set in the indication state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the precursor state game number counter has been set (step S109-18-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-18-12, and the precursor state game number counter is If it is determined that it has not been set (step S109-18-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-18-13.

(Step S109-18-12)
In step S109-18-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the return flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the return flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the return flag is when the winning number “19” “Black Seven BB” is won in the precursor state or when the winning number “19” “Black Seven BB” is won in the chance state. This is a flag for returning to the winning state (precursor state or chance state) again after the end of the BB. In other words, if the winning number “19” “Black Seven BB” is won, after the end of the BB, it will shift to “normal state”, but the precursor state is “chance state” or “ART ready state” Since it is a state in which it is determined to shift to any of the above, the “Black Seven BB” winning of the winning number “19” in the precursor state is exceptionally returned to the precursor state after the end of the BB. It is configured. In addition, as described in FIG. 12, the chance state is a state in which the winning combination other than the special small role has a chance to shift to the “ART ready state” as compared with the “normal state”. The winning of “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” is exceptionally configured to return to the chance state after the end of BB. As a result, if it is a sign state, the winning number “19” for “Black Seven BB” will be won even though it has been decided to move to either “chance state” or “ART ready state”. Can prevent loss of the right to shift to the “chance state” or “ART ready state”, and if it is the chance state, the lottery to shift to the “ART ready state” is more advantageous than the “normal state” Can be prevented from being lost. Then, when the process of step S109-18-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18-13.

(Step S109-18-13)
In step S109-18-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal carryover state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal carryover state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-18-13 ends, the subroutine for the precursor state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-18-14)
In step S <b> 109-18-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART carry-over state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting information related to the “ART carryover state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-18-14 ends, the subroutine for the precursor state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-18-15)
In step S <b> 109-18-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “−1” for the sign state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “−1” on the value of the sign state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-18-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18-16.

(Step S109-18-16)
In step S <b> 109-18-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the precursor state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the predecessor state game number counter is “0” (step S109-18-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-18-17, where the predecessor state game number counter is set. Is determined not to be “0” (step S109-18-16 = No), the subroutine for the precursor state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-18-17)
In step S109-18-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART preparation state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART preparation state winning flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. The ART ready state winning flag is a flag that is turned ON in step S109-2-17 in the normal state process of FIG. If it is determined that the ART ready state winning flag is ON (step S109-18-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-18-18, and the ART ready state winning flag is not ON. Is determined (step S109-18-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-18-20.

(Step S109-18-18)
In step S109-18-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-18-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18-19.

(Step S109-18-19)
In step S109-18-19, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the ART preparation state winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the ART preparation state winning flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-18-19 ends, the subroutine for the precursor state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-18-20)
In step S109-18-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “chance state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “chance state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-18-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18-21.

(Step S109-18-21)
In step S109-18-21, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the chance state winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the chance state winning flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-18-21 ends, the subroutine for the precursor state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Chance state processing)
Next, the chance state process performed by the process of step S109-19 of FIG. 17 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a subroutine of chance state processing.

(Step S109-19-1)
In step S109-19-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the winning combination is BB (step S109-19-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-19-2, and when it is determined that the winning combination is not BB. (Step S109-19-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-19-6.

(Step S109-19-2)
In step S109-19-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “19”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the winning combination is “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” in the BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is “19” (step S109-19-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-19-3, and it is determined that the winning number is not “19”. In this case (step S109-19-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-19-5.

(Step S109-19-3)
In step S109-19-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the return flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the return flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-19-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-19-4.

(Step S109-19-4)
In step S109-19-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal carryover state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal carryover state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-19-4 ends, the chance state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-19-5)
In step S <b> 109-19-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART carry-over state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting information related to the “ART carryover state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-19-5 ends, the chance state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-19-6)
In step S109-19-6, the main CPU 301 performs an ART shift lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process for shifting to the ART state based on the chance state lottery table of FIG. 12 and the winning combination. Then, when the process of step S109-19-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-19-7.

(Step S109-19-7)
In step S109-19-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery process for shifting to the ART state is won as a result of performing the ART shift lottery process in step S109-19-6. If it is determined that the lottery process for shifting to the ART state is won (step S109-19-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-19-8, and the lottery process for shifting to the ART state is won. If it is determined that it has not (step S109-19-7 = No), the chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-19-8)
In step S109-19-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-19-8 is completed, the chance state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Information setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 26, the information setting process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 15 is demonstrated. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a subroutine of information setting processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S110-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is a batting order combination. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination acquired in step S110-1 is a batting order combination. When it is determined that the winning combination is a batting order (step S110-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-3, and when it is determined that the winning combination is not a batting order ( Step S110-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-13.

(Step S110-3)
In step S110-3, the main CPU 301 performs state and period acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the state based on the value of the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and also acquires the period based on the value of the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S110-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state A is in the advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state and period acquired in step S110-3 are the state A in the advantageous period. Here, the state A corresponds to “ART state”, “ART preparation state”, and “ART carry-over state”. That is, when the value is in the advantageous period and a value corresponding to one of these states is stored in the state storage area, the process is determined to be affirmative. If it is determined that the state A is in the advantageous period (step S110-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-5, and if it is determined that the state A is not in the advantageous period ( Step S110-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7.

(Step S110-5)
In step S110-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction information (present) command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the instruction information (present) command to the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the instruction information (present) command to the sub-control board 400. Perform processing to set to. Then, when the process of step S110-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-6.

  Here, the “instruction information (present) command” means “push order replay A” of the winning number “02” to “push order replay E” of the winning number “06” and “first press of the winning number“ 12 ”. This is a command for designating the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 when “5th push order bell” of “order bell” to winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination. Specifically, when “Push Order Replay A” of the winning number “02” is determined as the winning combination, the left stop button 11 on which the symbol combination related to “Transition Replay” is displayed is first operated. Then, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and an instruction information (present) command indicating that the right stop button 13 is operated last is set. For convenience, if the left stop button 11 is “1”, the middle stop button 12 is “2”, and the right stop button 13 is “3”, “Push Order Replay A” with the winning number “02” is determined as the winning combination. The instruction information (with) command in the case of the content is “123” or “12” (the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, the right stop button 13 is operated last) ) Command. Hereinafter, similarly, the instruction information (with) command when the “push order replay B” of the winning number “03” is determined as the winning combination is “132” or “13” (the left stop button 11 is first displayed). , The right stop button 13 is then operated, and the middle stop button 12 is lastly operated), and the instruction in the case where “the push order replay C” of the winning number “04” is determined as the winning combination is indicated. The information (present) command is a command such as “213” or “21” (the middle stop button 12 is operated first, the left stop button 11 is operated next, and the right stop button 13 is operated last). When the command is set and the command number “05” “push order replay D” is determined as the winning combination, the instruction information (with) command is “231” or “23” (the middle stop button 12 is set first) And then the right stop button 13 is operated next, and the left stop button 11 is lastly operated), and the instruction information when the “push order replay E” of the winning number “06” is determined as the winning combination. The (with) command sets a command with a content such as “3” (right stop button 13 is operated first). When the winning number “12” “first push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, the instruction information (present) command has contents such as “123” or “12” (the left stop button 11 is operated first, Next, the command of the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the command of the right stop button 13 is operated last. The instruction information when the “second push order bell” of the winning number “13” is determined as the winning combination (there is ) Command is set to a command such as “132” or “13” (the left stop button 11 is operated first, the right stop button 13 is operated next, and the middle stop button 12 is operated last), When the winning number “14” “third push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, the instruction information (present) command is “213” or “21” (the middle stop button 12 is operated first, Left stop button 11 is operated next, the right stop button 13 is operated last), and the command information (with) command when the winning number “15” “4th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination is , “231” or “23” (the middle stop button 12 is operated first, the right stop button 13 is operated next, and the left stop button 11 is operated last), and the winning number “ For the instruction information (present) command when “5th push order bell” of “16” is determined as the winning combination, a command with the content “3” (right stop button 13 is operated first) is set.

(Step S110-6)
In step S110-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a conditional device (rounding) command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the conditional device (rounding) command to the sub-control board 400, and sends the conditional device (rounding) command to the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform processing to set to. When the process of step S110-6 ends, the information setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

  Here, the “conditional device (rounding) command” is a command that does not indicate specific contents as a conditional device command when a winning combination is won. Specifically, even when “Push Order Replay A” of the winning number “02” is determined as the winning combination, the condition device command content is set as “Push Order Replay” that does not indicate specific content, Even when “Push Order Replay B” of the number “03” is determined as the winning combination, the content of the conditional device command is set as “Push Order Replay” indicating no specific content, and the “No. 04” of the winning number “04” is set. Even when “Push Order Replay C” is determined as the winning combination, the condition device command content is set as “Push Order Replay” indicating no specific content, and “Push Order Replay D” of the winning number “05” is set. Even if the winning combination is determined, the condition device command content is set as “push order replay” that does not indicate specific contents, and the “push order replay E” of the winning number “06” is selected as the winning combination. Even if you were determined, the content of the condition device command does not show the specific contents of which are set as "push order Replay". As a result, it becomes impossible to determine which push order replay is won from the conditional device command. Similarly, even when the “first push order bell” of the winning number “12” is determined as the winning combination, the content of the conditional device command is set as “push order bell” which does not indicate the specific contents, Even when the “second push order bell” of the winning number “13” is determined as the winning combination, the content of the conditional device command is set as “push order bell” not showing the specific contents, and the winning number “14” Even if the “third push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, the condition device command content is set as “push order bell” indicating no specific content, and the “fourth push order” with the winning number “15” is set. Even if “order bell” is determined as the winning combination, the condition device command content is set as “push order bell” that does not indicate specific contents, and “5th push order bell” with the winning number “16” is won. Even if you decide as a role, The contents of the matter apparatus command does not show the specific contents of which are set as "push order bell". On the other hand, in the above-described state A in which the operation order is notified, since the “instruction information (present) command” is set in step S110-5, the sub-control board 400 starts from the condition device (rounding) command. , “Push order replay” or “push order bell” can be discriminated, and the operation order can be discriminated from the “instruction information (present) command”. An operation order using the device 31 or the like can be notified. As described above, since the “condition device (rounding) command” and the “instruction information (present) command” are configured to be transmitted separately, for example, in the ART state, the player can predict the operation order, When an operation order operated by a player matches a predetermined operation order, an unauthorized person tries to obtain a privilege illegally in a case where a game characteristic is added to increase the number of games in the ART state. Even when trying to analyze a command, it is necessary to analyze both the "condition device (rounding) command" and the "instruction information (with) command", so the task of analyzing the command in an unauthorized manner is complicated. Can be. As a result, a gaming machine resistant to fraud can be realized. In the present embodiment, in the state A described above, the “condition device (rounding) command” and the “instruction information (present) command” are transmitted separately. For example, the winning number “12” When the “first push order bell” of “” is determined as the winning combination, only the condition device command indicating the content of “first push order bell” may be transmitted.

(Step S110-7)
In step S110-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the state B is in the advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state and period acquired in step S110-3 are the state B in the advantageous period. Here, the state B corresponds to a “high probability state” and a “chance state”. That is, when the value is in the advantageous period and a value corresponding to one of these states is stored in the state storage area, the process is determined to be affirmative. If it is determined that the state B is in the advantageous period (step S110-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-8, and if it is determined that the state B is not in the advantageous period ( Step S110-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-11.

(Step S110-8)
In step S110-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the notified flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the notified flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the notified flag is ON (step S110-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-11, and when it is determined that the notified flag is not ON ( Step S110-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9.

(Step S110-9)
In step S110-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction information (present) command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the instruction information (present) command to the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the instruction information (present) command to the sub-control board 400. Perform processing to set to. Then, when the process of step S110-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-10)
In step S110-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a conditional device (rounding) command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the conditional device (rounding) command to the sub-control board 400, and sends the conditional device (rounding) command to the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform processing to set to. When the process of step S110-10 ends, the information setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Step S110-11)
In step S110-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction information (none) command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the instruction information (none) command to the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the instruction information (none) command to the sub-control board 400. Perform processing to set to. Then, when the process of step S110-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-12.

  Here, the “instruction information (none) command” means “push order replay A” of the winning number “02” to “push order replay E” of the winning number “06”, and “first press of the winning number“ 12 ”. This is a command that does not specify the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 when “5th push order bell” of “order bell” to winning number “16” is determined as a winning combination. Specifically, the instruction information (none) command “-” that does not designate the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is set regardless of which winning order combination is won. . Therefore, in the sub-control board 400 that has received the command, it is not possible to identify which operation order, for example, “normal state”, “normal carry-over state”, which is neither state A nor state B, In the “normal bonus state” and “ART bonus state”, the operation order is not notified. Note that the “instruction information (none) command” is not necessarily transmitted, and only the conditional device (rounding) command set in step S110-12, which will be described later, may be set and transmitted.

(Step S110-12)
In step S110-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a conditional device (rounding) command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the conditional device (rounding) command to the sub-control board 400, and sends the conditional device (rounding) command to the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform processing to set to. When the process of step S110-12 ends, the information setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Step S110-13)
In step S110-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the winning combination is BB (step S110-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-14, and when it is determined that the winning combination is not BB (step S110). −13 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-17.

(Step S110-14)
In step S110-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for shifting the gaming state to the third RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “third RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-15.

(Step S110-15)
In step S110-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “19”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the winning combination is “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” in the BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is “19” (step S110-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-16, and if it is determined that the winning number is not “19” ( Step S110-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-17.

(Step S110-16)
In step S110-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the recognition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the recognition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-17.

(Step S110-17)
In step S110-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . When the process of step S110-17 ends, the information setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Start period management process)
Next, based on FIG. 27, the start time period management process performed by the process of step S111 of FIG. 15 will be described. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a subroutine of start period management processing.

(Step S111-1)
In step S111-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the advantageous period counter is being set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not a value (a value other than “0”) is set in an advantageous period counter provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the advantageous period counter is being set (step S111-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-2, and when it is determined that the advantageous period counter is not being set. (Step S111-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S111-6.

(Step S111-2)
In step S111-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the small payout of the maximum payout number has been notified. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303 to determine whether the small payout of the maximum payout number has been informed based on whether the informed flag is ON. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the small payout of the maximum payout number has been notified (step S111-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-3, and the small payout of the maximum payout number has not been notified. Is determined (step S111-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4.

(Step S111-3)
In step S111-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the notified flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the notified flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4.

(Step S111-4)
In step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the advantageous period counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the advantageous period counter provided in the main RAM 303. In this embodiment, in the display period management process of FIG. 35 described later, “1500” is set and thereafter subtracted. However, the display period management process of FIG. In step S111-4, “0” may be set and addition may be performed in step S111-4. Further, the subtracting (or adding) processing itself may be performed in the display time period management processing of FIG. Then, when the process of step S111-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-5.

(Step S111-5)
In step S111-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value after subtraction is “0”. Specifically, in step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the advantageous period counter has become “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the advantageous period counter. If it is determined that the value after subtraction is “0” (step S111-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6, and it is determined that the value after subtraction is not “0”. If it is determined (step S111-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-7.

(Step S111-6)
In step S111-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the management period is a standby period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not information indicating a standby period is stored in the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. The main RAM 303 is provided with a period management area for managing a period managed by the main control board 300, and stores information indicating each period. If it is determined that the management period is the standby period (step S111-6 = Yes), the start period management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process for management. If it is determined that the period is not the standby period (step S111-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-7.

(Step S111-7)
In step S111-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is a normal state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to a normal state is set in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state to be managed is the normal state (step S111-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8, and if it is determined that the state to be managed is not the normal state ( Step S111-7 = No), the start period management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-8)
In step S111-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the management period to the normal period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to a normal period in a period management area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-8 ends, the start period management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

  Although related to FIG. 59 described later, the case where it is determined in step S111-5 in FIG. 27 that the value after the subtraction is not “0” and the state is determined to be the normal state in step S111-7. For example, it is assumed that a falling lottery performed when the state managed by the main control board 300 is a high probability state is won. That is, in the high-probability state process of FIG. 23 performed prior to FIG. 27, when the falling lottery is won, the state managed by the main control board 300 becomes the normal state. In such a case, when the notified flag is ON, the period managed in step S111-8 is referred to as a normal period as the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts from the high probability state to the normal state. To do. On the other hand, in the case where it is determined in step S111-5 in FIG. 27 that the value after subtraction is not “0” and the state is determined not to be the normal state in step S111-7, for example, by the main control board 300 A case where the falling lottery performed when the state to be managed is a high probability state is not won is assumed. That is, in the high probability state process of FIG. 23 performed prior to FIG. 27, if the falling lottery is not won, the state managed by the main control board 300 remains in the high probability state. In such a case, even if the notified flag is ON, the advantageous period is continued until the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts from the high probability state to the normal state.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 28, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S118 of FIG. 15 will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S118-1)
In step S118-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the bonus operating flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the BB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. In this embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines that the bonus operating flag is ON when the BB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. When the BB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF, processing for determining that the bonus operating flag is not ON is performed. When it is determined that the bonus operating flag is ON (step S118-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-2, and when it is determined that the bonus operating flag is not ON. (Step S118-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S118-3.

(Step S118-2)
In step S118-2, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus operating process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-2 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-3)
In step S <b> 118-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the blank” is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the blank” is displayed on the active line based on the display determination process of step S116. And when it determines with "the combination of the design which concerns on a blank" being displayed on the effective line (step S118-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S118-4, and the "combination of the design which concerns on a blank""Is not displayed on the active line (step S118-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-5.

(Step S118-4)
In step S118-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for shifting the gaming state to the “first RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “first RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-4 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-5)
In step S118-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “combination of symbols related to transition replay” is displayed on the active line based on the display determination process of step S116. If it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to transition replay” is displayed on the active line (step S118-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-6, and “the symbol related to transition replay” If it is determined that “combination of” is not displayed on the active line (step S118-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-7.

(Step S118-6)
In step S118-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the gaming state to the “second RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “second RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-6 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-7)
In step S118-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to the bonus is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line based on the display determination process of step S116. If it is determined that the symbol combination related to the bonus is displayed on the active line (step S118-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-8, and the symbol combination related to the bonus is the active line. If it is determined that it is not displayed above (step S118-7 = No), the game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-8)
In step S118-8, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus operating flag update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the bonus operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to ON when “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed on the active line. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S118-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-9.

(Step S118-9)
In step S118-9, the main CPU 301 performs bonus operation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a predetermined value to the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. , A process of clearing the value of the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, a process of setting the value of the game possible number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and a winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 And processing to set a value. When the process of step S118-9 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119 of the main loop process.

(Processing by display status)
Next, based on FIG. 29, the processing according to the state at the time of display performed by the process of step S119 of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing by state at the time of display.

(Step S119-1)
In step S <b> 119-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal carryover state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal carryover state” is based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “normal carryover state” (step S119-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2, and if it is determined that the state is not “normal carryover state” ( Step S119-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-3.

(Step S119-2)
In step S119-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display normal carryover state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a normal bonus state when the bonus symbol is displayed on the active line, or a process for turning on the advantageous period transition flag when the standby period transition flag is ON. Etc. Then, when the process of step S119-2 is completed, the subroutine of the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-3)
In step S119-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal bonus state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal bonus state” is based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “normal bonus state” is set (step S119-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4, and if it is determined that the “normal bonus state” is not set. (Step S119-3 = No), the process proceeds to Step S119-5.

(Step S119-4)
In step S119-4, the main CPU 301 performs a normal time bonus state process during display, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that if the ART winning flag is ON at the end of the bonus, a process for shifting to the ART preparation state, or an advantageous period transition flag when the ART winning flag is not ON but is in an advantageous period. When the return flag is ON, when the return flag is ON, the transition to the precursor state or the chance state, or when the ART winning flag is not ON, it is not an advantageous period, and the return flag is not ON. Processing for shifting to the normal state, processing for turning off the recognition flag, etc. if the recognition flag is ON are performed. Then, when the process of step S119-4 is completed, the subroutine of the display state process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-5)
In step S119-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is in the “ART ready state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “ART ready state” (step S119-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6, and if it is determined that the state is not “ART ready state” ( Step S119-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-7.

(Step S119-6)
In step S119-6, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time ART preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the management period is the normal period, the main CPU 301 initializes all the information related to the advantageous period and shifts to the normal state, or “the combination of symbols related to the transition replay” is on the effective line. , The process managed by the main control board 300 is shifted to the “ART state”, and “50” games are displayed as the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. Perform processing to set to. Then, when the process of step S119-6 is completed, the subroutine for the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-7)
In step S119-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “carrying state during ART”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is “the carry-over state during ART” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “the carry-over state during ART” (step S119-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8, and if it is determined that the state is not “the carry-over state during ART”. (Step S119-7 = No), the process proceeds to Step S119-9.

(Step S119-8)
In step S119-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process for the carry-over state during display ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a bonus state during ART when a bonus symbol is displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S119-8 is completed, the subroutine for the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-9)
In step S119-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “art bonus state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “bonus state during ART” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the bonus state is during ART (step S119-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10, and if it is determined that the bonus state is not during ART (step S119). −9 = No), and the process proceeds to step S119-11.

(Step S119-10)
In step S 119-10, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus process during the display-time ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34. In this processing, the main CPU 301 initializes all information related to the advantageous period when the bonus period is normal, and shifts to the normal state, or when the bonus period is not normal. , Processing for shifting to the ART ready state, processing for turning off the recognition flag when the recognition flag is ON, and the like are performed. Then, when the process of step S119-10 is completed, the subroutine for the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-11)
In step S119-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal state” is based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And when it determines with it being a normal state (step S119-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S119-12, and when it determines with it not being a normal state (step S119-11 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S119-15.

(Step S119-12)
In step S119-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the high probability state transition flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the high probability state transition flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the high probability state transition flag is ON (step S119-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-13, and it is determined that the high probability state transition flag is not ON. In that case (step S119-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-15.

(Step S119-13)
In step S119-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to a “high probability state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “high probability state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14.

(Step S119-14)
In step S119-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the high probability state transition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the high probability state transition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-14 is completed, the subroutine for the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-15)
In step S119-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “ART state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the state is the ART state (step S119-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16, and when it is determined that the state is not the ART state (step S119-15 = No). ), The subroutine for the state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-16)
In step S119-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the management period is a normal period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information indicating a normal period is stored in the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the management period is the normal period (step S119-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-17, and if it is determined that the management period is not the normal period ( Step S119-16 = No), the subroutine of the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-17)
In step S119-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of initializing all information related to the advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for initializing all the information related to the advantageous period stored in the main RAM 303 (for example, the value of the ART state game number counter). As a result, for example, in the ART state, when the maximum number of games that can be played continuously in the advantageous period reaches “1500” times, the ART state is forcibly terminated. Then, when the process of step S119-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-18.

(Step S119-18)
In step S119-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-18 is completed, the subroutine for the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Process for normal carry-over state when displayed)
Next, the display normal carryover state process performed by the process of step S119-2 of FIG. 29 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 30 is a view showing a subroutine of the normal carry-over state processing at the time of display.

(Step S119-2-1)
In step S119-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to the bonus is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line based on the display determination process of step S116. If it is determined that the combination of symbols related to the bonus is displayed on the active line (step S119-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-2, and the symbol related to the bonus is displayed. If it is determined that the combination is not displayed on the active line (step S119-2-1 = No), the display normal carry-over state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop processing. Transition.

(Step S119-2-2)
In step S119-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal bonus state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information relating to the “normal bonus state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-3.

(Step S119-2-3)
In step S119-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the standby period transition flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the standby period transition flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the standby period transition flag is a flag that is turned ON in step S109-2-6 in the normal state process of FIG. If it is determined that the standby period transition flag is ON (step S119-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-4, and it is determined that the standby period transition flag is not ON. If it is determined (step S119-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-6.

(Step S119-2-4)
In step S119-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the advantageous period transition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the advantageous period transition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. The flag is reflected in step S120-4 in the display time period management process of FIG. 35 described later, and information relating to the advantageous period is set in step S120-5. That is, in the standby period, when the symbol combination related to the bonus is displayed on the active line, the advantageous period is started after the symbol combination related to the bonus is displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S119-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-5.

(Step S119-2-5)
In step S119-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the standby period transition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the standby period transition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-2-5 is completed, the display normal carryover state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-2-6)
In step S119-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the management period is a standby period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not information indicating a standby period is stored in the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the management period is the standby period (step S119-2-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-7, and it is determined that the management period is not the standby period. In this case (step S119-2-6 = No), the display normal carryover state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop processing.

(Step S119-2-7)
In step S119-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the advantageous period transition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the advantageous period transition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. The flag is reflected in step S120-4 in the display time period management process of FIG. 35 described later, and information relating to the advantageous period is set in step S120-5. That is, in the standby period, when the symbol combination related to the bonus is displayed on the active line, the advantageous period is started after the symbol combination related to the bonus is displayed on the active line. When the process of step S119-2-7 ends, the display normal carryover state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Processing for normal bonus state when displayed)
Next, the normal time bonus state process at the time of display performed by the process of step S119-4 of FIG. 29 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a subroutine of normal time bonus state processing during display.

(Step S119-4-1)
In step S119-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the bonus prescribed payout number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 updates the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-2.

(Step S119-4-2)
In step S119-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a bonus end time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the bonus has ended based on the value in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining that the bonus is being ended when the value of the bonus operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF, When the value of the bonus operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON, it is determined that the bonus is not ended. If it is determined that the bonus is over (step S119-4-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4-3, and if it is determined that the bonus is not over ( Step S119-4-2 = No), the display-time normal bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S120 of the main loop processing.

(Step S119-4-3)
In step S119-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on the value stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S119-4-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4-4, and it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON. In the case (step S119-4-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-4-6.

(Step S119-4-4)
In step S119-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-5.

(Step S119-4-5)
In step S119-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-4-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-12.

(Step S119-4-6)
In step S119-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the management period is an advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information indicating an advantageous period is stored in the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the period to be managed is an advantageous period (step S119-4-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4-7, and it is determined that the period to be managed is not an advantageous period. In the case (step S119-4-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-4-8.

(Step S119-4-7)
In step S119-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the advantageous period transition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the advantageous period transition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-8.

(Step S119-4-8)
In step S119-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the return flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the return flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the return flag is ON (step S119-4-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4-9. When it is determined that the return flag is not ON ( In step S119-4-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-4-11.

(Step S119-4-9)
In step S119-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “precursor state” or the “chance state”. Specifically, when the return flag is ON, the main CPU 301 is a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to return to the state when the BB is won (“prediction state” or “chance state”). In addition, processing for setting information related to the “predictor state” or the “chance state” is performed. Here, the main CPU 301 sets the return flag in step S109-18-12 of the precursor state process in FIG. 24 or step S109-19-3 of the chance state process in FIG. When the return flag is turned ON at -12, the return flag for the precursor state is turned ON. When the return flag is turned ON at step S109-19-3, the return flag for the chance state is turned ON. By doing so, in step S119-4-9, it is possible to return to the state at the time of BB winning ("predictor state" or "chance state"). Then, when the process of step S119-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-10.

(Step S119-4-10)
In step S119-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the return flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the return flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-12.

(Step S119-4-11)
In step S119-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-4-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-12.

(Step S119-4-12)
In step S119-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the recognition flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the recognition flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the recognition flag is ON (step S119-4-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4-13, and when it is determined that the recognition flag is not ON ( In step S119-4-12 = No), the display-time normal bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 in the main loop processing.

(Step S119-4-13)
In step S119-4-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the recognition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the recognition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-4-13 is completed, the display-time normal bonus state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Processing for ART preparation state at the time of display)
Next, the display-time ART preparation state process performed by the process of step S119-6 of FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a subroutine for display-time ART preparation state processing.

(Step S119-6-1)
In step S119-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the period to be managed is a normal period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information indicating a normal period is stored in the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the management period is a normal period (step S119-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-2, and it is determined that the management period is not a normal period. In the case (step S119-6-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-4.

(Step S119-6-2)
In step S119-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of initializing all information related to the advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for initializing all the information related to the advantageous period stored in the main RAM 303 (for example, the value of the ART state game number counter). As a result, for example, in the ART state, when the maximum number of games that can be played continuously in the advantageous period reaches “1500” times, the ART state is forcibly terminated. Then, when the process of step S119-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-6-3.

(Step S119-6-3)
In step S119-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-3 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time ART ready state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-4)
In step S119-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to transition replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to transition replay” is displayed on the active line (step S119-6-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-5, If it is determined that the “replay symbol combination” is not displayed on the active line (step S119-6-4 = No), the display-time ART ready state processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S120.

(Step S119-6-5)
In step S119-6-5, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” based on the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Do. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S119-6-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-6 to display the ART state game. If it is determined that the value of the number counter is not “0” (step S119-6-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-7.

(Step S119-6-6)
In step S119-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-6-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-6-7.

(Step S119-6-7)
In step S119-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-7 ends, the subroutine for the display-time ART preparation state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Processing for carryover state during ART during display)
Next, based on FIG. 33, the display time carry-over state processing performed during the processing of step S119-8 of FIG. 29 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the carry-over state processing during ART during display.

(Step S119-8-1)
In step S119-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the bonus is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the combination of symbols related to the bonus is displayed on the active line (step S119-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-2, and the symbol related to the bonus is displayed. When it is determined that the combination is not displayed on the active line (step S119-8-1 = No), the subroutine for the carry-over state processing during ART at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process. To migrate.

(Step S119-8-2)
In step S 119-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART bonus state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART bonus state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. In this process, a bonus prescribed payout number (for example, “200”) is set in a payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. In addition, in the processing, it is described that the state is set to “bonus state during ART”. Strictly speaking, any state of “normal BB state during ART” or “special BB state during ART” shown in FIG. Is intended to be. When the process of step S119-8-2 is completed, the subroutine for the carry-over state process during display ART is ended, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Processing for bonus state during ART during display)
Next, based on FIG. 34, the bonus state process during ART during display performed by the process of step S119-10 of FIG. 29 will be described. FIG. 34 is a view showing a subroutine of bonus state processing during ART during display.

(Step S119-10-1)
In step S119-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for updating the bonus prescribed payout number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 updates the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-10-2.

(Step S119-10-2)
In step S119-10-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a bonus end time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the bonus has ended based on the value in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the bonus is over (step S119-10-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10-3. If it is determined that the bonus is not over ( Step S119-10-2 = No), the subroutine for the bonus state processing during ART at the time of display is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S120 of the main loop processing.

(Step S119-10-3)
In step S <b> 119-10-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the management period is a normal period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information indicating a normal period is stored in the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. And when it determines with the period to manage being a normal period (step S119-10-3 = Yes), it shifted to the process to step S119-10-4, and determined with the period to manage not being a normal period. In that case (step S119-10-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-10-6.

(Step S119-10-4)
In step S <b> 119-10-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for initializing all the information related to the advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for initializing all the information related to the advantageous period stored in the main RAM 303 (for example, the value of the ART state game number counter). Thus, for example, in the bonus state during the ART, when the maximum number of games that can be played continuously in the advantageous period has reached “1500” times, the normal state is not entered at the end of the BB without shifting to the ART ready state. To migrate. Then, when the process of step S119-10-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-10-5.

(Step S119-10-5)
In step S <b> 119-10-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-10-5 is completed, the subroutine for the bonus state process during display ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-10-6)
In step S <b> 119-10-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to “ART ready state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-10-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-10-7.

(Step S119-10-7)
In step S119-10-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the recognition flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the recognition flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the recognition flag is ON (step S119-10-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10-8, and when it is determined that the recognition flag is not ON ( In step S119-10-7 = No), the subroutine for bonus state processing during ART during display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of main loop processing.

(Step S119-10-8)
In step S119-10-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the recognition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the recognition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-10-8 is completed, the subroutine for the bonus state process during ART during display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Display period management process)
Next, a display time period management process performed by the process of step S120 of FIG. 15 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a subroutine for display period management processing.

(Step S120-1)
In step S120-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the standby period transition flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the standby period transition flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the standby period transition flag is ON (step S120-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-2, and when it is determined that the standby period transition flag is not ON. (Step S120-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S120-4.

(Step S120-2)
In step S120-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the management period to the standby period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information indicating a standby period in a period management area provided in the main RAM 303. As a result, the period managed by the main control board 300 becomes the “standby period”. Then, when the process of step S120-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-3.

(Step S120-3)
In step S120-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the standby period transition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the standby period transition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S120-3 is completed, the display time period management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S120-4)
In step S120-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the advantageous period transition flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the advantageous period transition flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the advantageous period transition flag is ON (step S120-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-5, and when it is determined that the advantageous period transition flag is not ON. (Step S120-4 = No), the process proceeds to Step S120-8.

(Step S120-5)
In step S120-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the management period to an advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information indicating an advantageous period in a period management area provided in the main RAM 303. As a result, the period managed by the main control board 300 becomes an “advantageous period”. Then, when the process of step S120-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-6.

(Step S120-6)
In step S120-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1500” to the advantageous period counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1500” in an advantageous period counter provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the main RAM 303 is provided with an advantageous period counter, which is a counter for managing “1500” games, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the “advantage period” continuously. It is. That is, when “1500” is set in the process, the counter is decremented by “1” as long as the “advantage period” is set in each subsequent game. Then, when the process of step S120-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-7.

(Step S120-7)
In step S120-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the advantageous period transition flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the advantageous period transition flag in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S120-7 ends, the subroutine of the display time period management process ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S120-8)
In step S <b> 120-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the management period is a standby period or an advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether information indicating a standby period or information indicating an advantageous period is stored in a period management area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the management period is a standby period or an advantageous period (step S120-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-10, and the management period is a standby period or an advantageous period. If it is determined that there is not (step S120-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-9.

(Step S120-9)
In step S120-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the management period to the normal period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing information indicating a normal period in a period management area provided in the main RAM 303. As a result, the period managed by the main control board 300 becomes the “normal period”. When the process of step S120-9 is completed, the display time period management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S120-10)
In step S120-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is a normal state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to a normal state is set in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the case where the advantageous period is determined in step S120-8 and the normal state is determined in this processing is assumed to be when the ART state game number counter becomes “0” in the ART state. . If it is determined that the state to be managed is the normal state (step S120-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-11, and if it is determined that the state to be managed is not the normal state ( Step S120-10 = No), the display time period management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S120-11)
In step S120-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the management period to the normal period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to a normal period in a period management area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S120-11 ends, the display time period management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

  In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal state process of FIG. 18, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous period, the advantageous period transition flag is turned ON, and in the display time period management process of FIG. 35, If the advantageous period transition flag is ON, the management period is regarded as the advantageous period, and “1500” is set. However, for example, in the normal state processing of FIG. Then, when the advantageous period transition flag is turned ON and the advantageous period transition flag is ON in the start period management process of FIG. 27 (after the start lever 10 is operated), the management period is set to the advantageous period “1500. It may be configured to perform “set” times. In other words, the process performed based on the operation of the start lever 10 may complete the process for setting the advantageous period.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, the interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “2.233 ms”. An arbitrary value may be used for “2.233 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving various signals from the status board 100, the reel control board 150, and the power supply board 200. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs timer measurement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum game time and the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “3” corresponding to the right reel 20 as the initial value of the reel number, and drives the right stepping motor 153 corresponding to the reel number “3”, thereby Rotation acceleration, constant speed, deceleration control, etc. are performed. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number, and drives the intermediate stepping motor 152 corresponding to the reel number “2”, thereby controlling the acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration of the rotation of the intermediate reel 19. Etc. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number and drives the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the reel number “1”, thereby controlling the acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration of the rotation of the left reel 18. Etc. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs external signal output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentration terminal board 30 and the like. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs LED display processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating display data of a MAXBET button lamp (not shown), the stored number display 15 and the payout number display 16. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting a command set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs port output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of transmitting various signals to the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S208 ends, the process proceeds to step S209.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S209 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(LED display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 37, the LED display process performed by the process of step S206 of FIG. 36 is demonstrated. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a subroutine of LED display processing.

(Step S206-1)
In step S <b> 206-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether it is time to create BET lamp data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether it is time to create BET lamp data for turning on or off a MAXBET button lamp (not shown). Here, in this embodiment, when the main sensor 301 detects that the selector sensor 14s has inserted a medal into the medal slot 6, or when the MAXBET switch 8sw detects the operation of the MAXBET button 8, “Replay” is performed. When the “combination of symbols” is displayed on the active line, a process is performed to determine that it is time to create BET lamp data for turning on or off the LED of the MAXBET button lamp (not shown). If it is determined that the BET ramp data is being created (step S206-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-2. If it is determined that the BET ramp data is not being created ( Step S206-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-3.

(Step S206-2)
In step S206-2, the main CPU 301 performs a BET lamp LED data creation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating BET lamp data for turning on or off a MAXBET button lamp (not shown). Then, when the process of step S206-2 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to interrupt process step S207.

(Step S206-3)
In step S <b> 206-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create the stored number indicator data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create stored number display data for turning on or off the stored number display 15. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 detects that the selector sensor 14 s has inserted a medal into the medal slot 6 and adds the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the winning symbol combination "is displayed on the active line and the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is added, the BET switch 7sw detects the operation of the BET button 7 and is provided in the main RAM 303. When the stored number counter value is subtracted, when the MAXBET switch 8sw detects the operation of the MAXBET button 8 and subtracts the stored number counter value provided in the main RAM 303, the stored number indicator data is generated. The process which determines that it is is performed. If it is determined that the stored number indicator data is being created (step S206-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-4, and it is determined that the stored number indicator data is not being created. In this case (step S206-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-5.

(Step S206-4)
In step S206-4, the main CPU 301 performs LED data creation processing for the stored number indicator. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating stored number display data for turning on or off the LED of the stored number display 15. When the process of step S206-4 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to interrupt process step S207.

(Step S206-5)
In step S <b> 206-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is time to create payout number display data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create payout number display data for turning on or off the payout number display 16. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 notifies the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 when “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. When it is time to perform, or when the advantageous period indicator (paid-out number display 16) notifies that it is an “advantageous period”, processing for determining that it is time to create payout number display data is performed. If it is determined that the payout number display data is being created (step S206-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-6, and it is determined that the payout number display data is not being generated. In that case (step S206-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-9.

(Step S206-6)
In step S206-6, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction information display LED data creation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of creating payout number display data for turning on / off the LED of the payout number display 16. Then, when the process of step S206-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S206-7.

(Step S206-7)
In step S206-7, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number display LED data creation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 creates payout number display LED data for displaying the payout number on the payout number display 16 when the “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. Process. Then, when the process of step S206-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S206-8.

(Step S206-8)
In step S206-8, the main CPU 301 performs a period display LED data creation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of creating advantageous period LED data when the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantageous period”. When the process of step S206-8 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S207 of the interrupt process.

(Step S206-9)
In step S206-9, the main CPU 301 performs various LED data creation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 creates replay display LED data for lighting a replay display lamp (not shown) that is turned on when the “replay symbol combination” is displayed on the active line. Processing and start lamp LED data creation processing for lighting a start lamp (not shown) that is turned on when the operation of the start lever 10 is effective are performed. When the process of step S206-9 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to interrupt process step S207.

(Instruction information display LED data creation process)
Next, the instruction information display LED data creation process performed by the process of step S206-6 of FIG. 37 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a subroutine of instruction information display LED data creation processing.

(Step S206-6-1)
In step S <b> 206-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an instruction information (present) command is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an instruction information (present) command is set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the instruction information (present) command is set (step S206-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-6-2, and the instruction information (present) command is changed. If it is determined that it is not set (step S206-6-1 = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S206-7 of the LED display process.

(Step S206-6-2)
In step S206-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs push order LED data creation processing. Specifically, when the “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 uses the push order bell to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. A process for creating the LED data for use is performed. Further, the main CPU 301 determines the push order replay LED data for notifying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 when “push order replay” is determined as the winning combination. Process to create. When the process of step S206-6-2 ends, the instruction information display LED data creation process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S206-7 of the LED display process.

(LED data creation processing for period display)
Next, based on FIG. 39, the period display LED data creation process performed by the process of step S206-8 of FIG. 37 will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a subroutine of period display LED data creation processing.

(Step S206-8-1)
In step S <b> 206-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the management period is an advantageous period. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information indicating an advantageous period is stored in the period management area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the period to be managed is an advantageous period (step S206-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-8-2, and it is determined that the period to be managed is not the advantageous period. In this case (step S206-8-1 = No), the period display LED data creation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S207 of the interrupt process.

(Step S206-8-2)
In step S206-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs an advantageous period LED data creation process. Specifically, when the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantageous period”, the main CPU 301 performs an advantageous period LED data creation process to turn on the segment 16 a of the payout number display 16. . Then, by performing the process, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is turned on, and the player is notified that it is an “advantageous period”. When the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is turned on during the advantageous period, the first interruption process after the information related to the advantageous period is set in the period management area in the display period management process of FIG. Then, the advantageous period LED data is created, and the created advantageous period LED data is transmitted to the status board 100 to light up. Roughly speaking, after the third stop operation is performed, the segment 16a of the payout number display unit 16 is turned on. When the process of step S206-8-2 ends, the period display LED data creation process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S207 of the interrupt process.

(First Modification in First Embodiment)
Next, a first modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. In FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, only different parts are described, and the processing for omitting the description is the same as the above-described content. When the normal state process in FIG. 40 is employed, the precursor state process in FIG. 41 may be used instead of the precursor state process in FIG. That is, in FIG. 41, the chance state precursor game number determination process and the ART preparation state precursor game number determination process are unnecessary.

(Step S109-2-34)
In step S109-2-34, the main CPU 301 performs a chance state precursor game number determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the chance state precursor game number in the precursor state lottery table of FIG. 13 and uses the chance state precursor game number of “4” game or the chance state of “16” game. The number of precursor games for chance state is determined from the number of precursor games, or the number of precursor games for chance state of “24” game, or the number of precursor games for chance state of “32” game. The sign state lottery table in FIG. 13 is configured to determine the number of predictor games based on the “chance state” win, but the winning combination that triggered the “chance state” win You may comprise so that the number of precursor games may be determined based on (for example, a special small part). Then, when the process of step S109-2-34 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-35.

(Step S109-2-35)
In step S109-2-35, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the chance state precursor game number determined in step S109-2-34 in the precursor state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-2-35 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-2-36.

  That is, in the first modification example of the first embodiment, the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined in the game in which the transition to the “chance state” is determined. That is, in the normal state process of FIG. 18 and the precursor state process of FIG. 24, the transition to the “chance state” is determined for the “1” game, and the “chance state” is determined for the “2” game. On the other hand, the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined based on the fact that in FIG. 40, the transition to the “chance state” is determined in the “1” game, and the “chance state” ”(Or the winning role that triggered the determination of the“ chance state ”), the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined. Thereby, the process related to the precursor state can be completed only in the “1” game, and the chance state precursor counter flag can be made unnecessary.

(Step S109-2-38)
In step S109-2-38, the main CPU 301 performs ART preparation state precursor game number determination processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the ART ready state precursor game number in the precursor state lottery table in FIG. 13, and determines the number of “4” game ART ready state precursor games or the “16” game ART. The number of ART preparation state precursor games is determined from the number of preparation state precursor games, the number of “24” game ART preparation state precursor games, or the number of “32” game ART preparation state precursor games. In the precursor state lottery table of FIG. 13, the number of precursor games is determined based on the winning of the “ART ready state”, but this is an opportunity to win the “ART ready state”. You may comprise so that the number of precursor games may be determined based on a winning combination (for example, special small combination). Then, when the process of step S109-2-38 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-39.

(Step S109-2-39)
In step S109-2-39, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the ART ready state precursor game number determined in step S109-2-38 in the precursor state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-2-39 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-40.

  That is, in the first modification of the first embodiment, the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined in the game in which the transition to the “ART ready state” is determined. That is, in the normal state process of FIG. 18 and the precursor state process of FIG. 24, the transition to the “ART ready state” is determined for the “1” game, and the “ART ready state” for the “2” game. 40, the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined. In FIG. 40, the transition to the “ART ready state” is determined in the “1” game, and Based on the determination of the “ART ready state” (or the winning combination that triggered the determination of the “ART ready state”), the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined. Thereby, the process related to the precursor state can be completed only in the “1” game, and the ART ready state precursor counter flag can be made unnecessary. Note that FIG. 41 differs from the precursor state process of FIG. 24 except for the chance state precursor game number determination process and the ART preparation state precursor game number determination process, and is the same in other respects. Detailed description is omitted.

(Second modification in the first embodiment)
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 42 to 44, only the different parts are described, and the process of omitting the description is the same as the above-described content. In addition, when the normal state process in FIG. 42 is adopted, the chance state precursor game number determination process and the ART preparation state precursor game number determination process are performed in FIGS. 43 and 44 described later. Therefore, the precursor state process of FIG. 41 may be used instead of the precursor state process of FIG. That is, in FIG. 41, the chance state precursor game number determination process and the ART preparation state precursor game number determination process are unnecessary.

  That is, in FIG. 42, as shown in steps S109-2-53 to S109-2-55, when the “chance state” is determined as the transition destination, the chance state winning flag is set to ON and the main The state managed by the control board 300 is configured to be a “precursor state”, and as shown in steps S109-2-56 and S109-2-57, “ART ready state” is determined as the transition destination. In such a case, the ART preparation state winning flag is set to ON, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is set to the “predictive state”. Therefore, the normal state process of FIG. 42 is configured not to perform the chance state precursor game number determination process or the ART ready state precursor game number determination process.

  Furthermore, in step S119-25 of the processing according to display state shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the “precursor state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “precursor state” is based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is the “precursor state” (step S119-25 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-26, and if it is determined that the state is not the “precursor state” (step S119). −25 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-27. Then, in step S119-26, a display time precursor state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44 is performed.

(Step S119-26-1)
That is, in step S119-26-1 of the display time precursor state process of FIG. 44, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is ON in various flag storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the chance state winning flag is ON (step S119-26-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-26-2, and it is determined that the chance state winning flag is not ON. If it is determined (step S119-26-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-26-4.

(Step S119-26-2)
Next, in step S119-26-2, the main CPU 301 performs a chance state precursor game number determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the chance state precursor game number in the precursor state lottery table of FIG. 13 and uses the chance state precursor game number of “4” game or the chance state of “16” game. The number of precursor games for chance state is determined from the number of precursor games, or the number of precursor games for chance state of “24” game, or the number of precursor games for chance state of “32” game. The sign state lottery table in FIG. 13 is configured to determine the number of predictor games based on the “chance state” win, but the winning combination that triggered the “chance state” win You may comprise so that the number of precursor games may be determined based on (for example, a special small part). Then, when the process of step S119-26-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-26-2.

(Step S119-26-3)
Next, in step S119-26-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the chance state precursor game number determined in step S119-26-2 in a precursor state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-26-3 is completed, the subroutine for display warning state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

  That is, in the second modified example of the first embodiment, after all the reels of the game for which the transition to the “chance state” is determined stop (when displayed), the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined. Configured to do. That is, in the normal state process of FIG. 18 and the precursor state process of FIG. 24, the transition to the “chance state” is determined for the “1” game, and the “chance state” is determined for the “2” game. On the basis of the above, the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined. In FIG. 44, after all reels of the “1” game are stopped (displayed), “chance” Based on the determination of the “state” (or the winning combination that triggered the determination of the “chance state”), the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined. Thereby, the process related to the precursor state can be completed only in the “1” game, and the chance state precursor counter flag can be made unnecessary.

(Step S119-26-4)
Next, in step S119-26-4, the main CPU 301 performs a ART ready state precursor game number determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the ART ready state precursor game number in the precursor state lottery table in FIG. 13, and determines the number of “4” game ART ready state precursor games or the “16” game ART. The number of ART preparation state precursor games is determined from the number of preparation state precursor games, the number of “24” game ART preparation state precursor games, or the number of “32” game ART preparation state precursor games. In the precursor state lottery table of FIG. 13, the number of precursor games is determined based on the winning of the “ART ready state”, but this is an opportunity to win the “ART ready state”. You may comprise so that the number of precursor games may be determined based on a winning combination (for example, special small combination). Then, when the process of step S119-26-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-26-5.

(Step S119-26-5)
Next, in step S119-26-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the ART ready state precursor game number determined in step S119-26-4 in a precursor state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-26-5 is completed, the subroutine of the display time precursor state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

  That is, in the second modified example of the first embodiment, after all the reels of the game for which the transition to the “ART ready state” has been stopped (when displayed), the number of precursor games in the precursor state is calculated. Configured to determine. That is, in the normal state process of FIG. 18 and the precursor state process of FIG. 24, the transition to the “ART ready state” is determined for the “1” game, and the “ART ready state” for the “2” game. 44, the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined. In FIG. 44, after all reels of the “1” game have stopped (during display), Based on the determination of the “ART ready state” (or the winning combination that triggered the determination of the “ART ready state”), the number of precursor games in the precursor state is determined. Thereby, the process related to the precursor state can be completed only in the “1” game, and the ART ready state precursor counter flag can be made unnecessary.

(Modification of ART state processing)
Next, a modification of the ART state process of FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 45, only the parts different from those in FIG. 21 will be described, and the processing to be omitted will be the same as the contents described in FIG.

(Step S119-10-13)
Next, in step S119-10-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “19”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the winning combination is “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” in the BB based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is “19” (step S109-10-13 = Yes), the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing is shifted to step S110 of the main loop processing to be selected. If it is determined that the number is not “19” (step S119-10-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-10-14.

  In step S119-10-14, a process for stopping the subtraction of the ART state game number counter is performed. In other words, in FIG. 21, it is configured such that if the BB is won in the ART state, the ART state game number counter is not subtracted regardless of the selected BB. However, in the modified example of FIG. If the BB is won, the ART state game number counter is continuously subtracted. If the BB other than the BB with the winning number “19” is won, the ART state game number counter is not subtracted. Configured. Thus, for example, when the set value is high, it becomes easier to win the BB with the winning number “19”, but on the other hand, the subtraction of the ART state game number counter is continued in this process. Therefore, it can be prevented that only gaming machines having a high set value are advantageous.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 401 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for checking an error in the sub RAM 403 and the like. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 401 performs main control board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for analyzing a command received from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 401 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of outputting sound from the speaker 33 based on the sound data determined by the sound data determination process in step S302-3-3 described later. For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state” and the “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, the sound “left” is sounded when the left stop button 11 is operated. Is output at the timing when the middle stop button 12 is operated, and the sound “right” is output at the timing when the right stop button 13 is operated. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 401 performs LED control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the LED 32 based on the LED data determined by the LED data determination process in step S302-3-2 described later. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 401 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the liquid crystal display device 31 based on the image data determined by the image data determination process in step S302-3-4 described later. For example, in the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, the operation order corresponding to the determined “push order bell” is liquid crystal. It is displayed on the display device 31. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 401 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of executing a predetermined process when the effect button sensor 21s detects an operation of the effect button 21 or when the cross key sensor 22s detects an operation of the cross key 22. Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main control board communication processing)
Next, the main control board communication process performed by the process of step S302 of FIG. 46 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main control board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a different command is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a command different from the command received last time. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). -1 = No), the main control board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for creating game information based on a command different from the previously transmitted command and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when a conditional device command is received, game information based on the conditional device command is created. When an instruction information (present) command or instruction information (none) command is received, game information based on the instruction information command is generated. create. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main control board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, based on FIG. 48, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 47 is demonstrated. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a sub effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 specifies a state managed by the main control board 300 based on a command received by the main control board 300, and creates an effect determination table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 402. Perform processing to select. Then, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining an effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like based on the selected effect determination table. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

  Here, for example, when the sub CPU 401 receives the condition device command related to BB as the condition device command in the ART state, that is, when the state managed in the main control board 300 is the “ART carryover state”, The production can be determined so as to execute the continuous production whether or not the BB is won over the games. In order to prevent the execution of continuous production from BB, for example, “watermelon” with winning number “08”, “weak cherry” with winning number “09”, “strong cherry” with winning number “10” Even when the conditional device command related to the “chance combination” with the winning number “11” is received, the effect is determined so as to execute the continuous effect whether or not the BB is won over a plurality of games. Can do. During the execution of the effect, the ART state game is not updated until the value of the ART state game number counter displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 is updated or the result of the continuous effect is notified. It is assumed that the value of the number counter is not displayed.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs LED data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the LED data corresponding to the production | presentation determined by the sub production | presentation determination process of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining sound data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining image data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-1. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. Note that in the second embodiment, only portions different from the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same portions as the first embodiment will be omitted.

  In the second embodiment, first, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process is different. That is, unlike the first embodiment, “Special Replay A” with a winning number “07”, “Special Replay B” with a winning number “08”, “Special Replay C” with a winning number “09”, and a winning number “ “Special Replay D” of “10” is further determined as a winning combination. However, as shown in FIG. 50, the gaming state in which these winning combinations can be determined as winning combinations is only the “second RT gaming state”, and is not determined as a winning combination in other gaming states. That is, the second embodiment is characterized in that a new game is provided by using a winning combination that is won only in the “ART state” corresponding to the “second RT gaming state”.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, in the “ART state” corresponding to the “second RT gaming state”, “164/65536” and “Special Replay A” with the winning number “07” are selected as the winning combination. With “164/65536”, “Special Replay B” with winning number “08” is determined as a winning combination, and with “164/65536”, “Special Replay C” with winning number “09” is selected as a winning combination. With “164/65536”, “Special Replay D” with the winning number “10” is determined as the winning combination. When the winning combination is won, the main control board 300 transmits an instruction information (present) command in step S110-5 in the information setting process of FIG. Specifically, when “Special Replay A” of the winning number “07” is determined as the winning combination, “Combination of symbols related to the 4th RT transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Is first operated, the left stop button 11 is operated next, and the right stop button 13 is operated last, and an instruction information (with) command “213” or “21” is transmitted. Similarly, when “Special Replay B” of the winning number “08” is determined as the winning combination, the instruction information (with) command “231” or “23” is transmitted, and the “No” of the winning number “09” is transmitted. When “Special Replay C” is determined as the winning combination, an instruction information (with) command “312” or “31” is transmitted, and “Special Replay D” with the winning number “10” is determined as the winning combination. In this case, an instruction information (present) command “321” or “32” is transmitted. The conditional device command may be, for example, whether “Special Replay A” with a winning number “07” is determined as a winning combination or “Special Replay B” with a winning number “08” is determined as a winning combination. , A conditional device (rounding) command “special replay” is transmitted. As a result, the sub-control board 400 that has received these commands is effective for the “combination of symbols relating to the 4th RT transition replay” in the selected “special replay” in the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like via the effect control board 500. The operation order displayed on the line can be notified.

  Then, as a result of winning one of the “special replays” and performing a stop operation in accordance with the notified operation sequence, the “control combination relating to the 4th RT transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the main control board 300 shifts the gaming state from the “second RT gaming state” to the “fourth RT gaming state”. Here, as shown in FIG. 50, the “4RT gaming state” is changed to “42159/65536” (winning number “01” to winning number “06” replaying) in “normal replay” of winning number “01”. As a result, the game is won with a total of “50159/65536”), which is an advantageous game state in which a game can be played without reducing the number of medals, as in the “second RT game state”. The “4th RT gaming state” is (b) a lottery using the ART pull-back lottery table shown in FIG. 51, which will be described later. If (3) the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, “200” times) without winning the transition to the ART state and without winning any BB, Is to be satisfied. In the case of (A), when the winning numbers “02” to “06” are won, the operation order in which “the combination of symbols related to transition replay” is displayed on the active line is notified, and “ The state shifts from the “fourth RT gaming state” to the “second RT gaming state” (ART state). In addition, in the “4th RT gaming state”, if the player has not won the transition to the ART state, winning one of the winning numbers “02” to “06” will result in “the symbol related to normal replay”. Since the operation order in which the “combination” is displayed on the activated line is notified, the “4th RT gaming state” to the “2nd RT gaming state” (ART Status). Here, in the case of (a), as will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, the “ART state” may result in a “fourth RT gaming state”. In this case, the ART pullback lottery table of FIG. 51 is used. The lottery using the ART pull-back lottery table shown in FIG. 51 is performed only in the “special state” to be described later after the “ART state” ends. Next, in the case of (b), a transition is made from the “fourth RT gaming state” to the “third RT gaming state”, after which “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line, The state shifts from “3RT gaming state” to “RB gaming state”. Next, in the case of (c), when a predetermined number of games (for example, “200”) are performed, the “fourth RT gaming state” is shifted to the “first RT gaming state”. The “fourth RT gaming state” is treated as a “normal period”.

  Then, in the “fourth RT gaming state”, when a special small role is won, a transition lottery of the ART state using the ART pullback lottery table of FIG. 51 is performed. That is, when shifting from the “second RT gaming state” (ART state) to the “fourth RT gaming state”, it is possible to play a game without reducing medals, as in the “second RT gaming state” (ART state). Since a lottery for returning to the ART state can be received again for a predetermined period, the gaming state is advantageous to the player. As shown in the ART pull-back lottery table of FIG. 51, if the winning number is “08” “watermelon”, “18/256” is won to shift to the “ART state” and “238/256”. Therefore, it is not won to shift to the “ART state”. In addition, if the winning number is “09”, “weak cherry”, “18/256” is won to shift to “ART state”, and “238/256” is not transferred to “ART state”. Winning. Further, if the winning number “10” is “strong cherry” and the winning number “11” is “chance combination”, “256/256” is won to shift to the “ART state”.

(Conceptual diagram of the second embodiment)
Next, the concept in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. According to FIG. 60, “X1” indicates ON / OFF of the “advantage period”, and “X2” indicates “Special Replay A” of the winning number “07” to “10” of the winning number “10”. Indicates the content of the notification when one of the “special replay D” is won, “X3” indicates ON / OFF of “state” (ART state), and “X4” indicates “state” ”(Special state) ON / OFF. In“ X5 ”,“ gaming state ”is“ RT1 ”(first RT gaming state),“ RT2 ”(second RT gaming state),“ RT4 ”( It indicates which of the 4th RT gaming state) is supported. In addition, at “Y1”, the “favorable period” of “X1” is turned ON, and the counting of the advantageous period is started (“1500” is set in the advantageous period counter in step S120-6 in FIG. 35). Is shown. In “Y1”, the “state” (ART state) of “X3” is also ON, and “RT2” (second RT gaming state) corresponding to the “ART state” is also ON, so “X1 The “advantage period” of “” is assumed to have been turned on in response to the shift to the “ART state” (strictly speaking, the “precursor state” that shifts to the “ART ready state”). In “Y2”, “X1” “advantage period” and “X3” “state” (ART state) indicate that “1400” games have been continuously played. Here, it is assumed that “Y2” wins the “ART state” extra lottery and the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” at the time of “Y2” is “101” or more. That is, in “Y4” described later, when the “advantage period” of “X1” reaches the “1500” game, the number of games that can be played in the “state” (ART state) of “X3” is “1” or more. Assuming that there is such a situation, the number of games that can be played in the ART state exceeds the number of games that can be played in the advantageous period. Further, “Y3” indicates that “a combination of symbols related to the fourth RT transition replay” is displayed on the active line. In “Y3”, “RT2” (second RT gaming state) is changed from “RT2” (second RT gaming state) to “RT4” (fourth RT gaming state) because “the combination of symbols relating to the fourth RT transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Indicates that it has migrated. In “Y4”, “X1” “advantage period” is continuously played from “Y1”, and as a result, “1500” game is reached. In this case, the “advantage period” of “X1” is turned OFF, and the “ART state” of “X3” is also forcibly turned OFF even if the number of games is “1” or more. It should be noted that, when the “1500” game is played continuously for the advantageous period and the end condition for the ART state is not satisfied, the situation is such that the ART state is terminated at the end of the advantageous period. Become.

  Here, when the game state to be managed is “RT4” (fourth RT game state), the main CPU 301 turns on the “state” (special state) of “X4” and sets the state to be managed to “special state”. And On the other hand, when the game state to be managed is not “RT4” (fourth RT game state), the “state” (special state) of “X4” is not turned on, and the state to be managed is set to “normal state”. The main control board 300 and the sub control board 400 are games that can be played in the “advantage period” in which the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “X1”, as in the above-described example of “Y2”. When the number exceeds the number (when the number of games in the “ART state” is “1” or more when the “1500” game is consumed), as indicated by “X2”, the winning number “07” When one of “special replay A” to “special replay D” of the winning number “10” is won, control for notifying the operation order corresponding to “fourth RT transition replay” is performed. Specifically, when “Special Replay A” of the winning number “07” is won, the middle stop button 12 is operated first, the left stop button 11 is operated next, and the right stop button 13 is finally operated. The operation order to be operated is displayed on the payout number display 16 or the liquid crystal display device 31. On the other hand, when the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” does not exceed the number of games in the “advantage period” of “X1” (when the “1500” game is consumed, the number of games in the “ART state” is “1”. "If the situation does not result in more than one"), if you win one of "Special Replay A" with winning number "07" to "Special Replay D" with winning number "10", the operation order corresponding to "Normal Replay" Is notified. Specifically, when “Special Replay A” of the winning number “07” is won, the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the right stop button 13 is finally operated. The operation order to be operated is displayed on the payout number display 16 or the liquid crystal display device 31.

  In the case of “ART state” in “RT2” (second RT gaming state), the operation order corresponding to “4th RT transition replay” is notified, and “RT4” (fourth RT gaming state) is entered. Even so, in “RT4” (fourth RT gaming state), as shown in FIG. 50, the replay probability is set to the same probability as “RT2” (second RT gaming state). Even if the transition is made, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable.

  Next, in the “special state”, a lottery using the ART pull-back lottery table shown in FIG. 51 is performed. Here, the value for winning the ART in the ART pull-back lottery table shown in FIG. 51 is higher than the value for winning the ART ready state in the normal state using FIG. 9B. When performing a pull-back lottery, it is more advantageous than when performing a lottery to shift to the ART preparation state in the normal state. In the “special state”, not only the pull-back lottery in the ART state, but also the “chance state” and the “high probability state” may be targeted for the lottery. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that it may win by a probability.

  By configuring as described above, the following advantages can be obtained. In other words, when the advantageous period reaches “1500” game, even if the number of games in the ART state is “1” or more, the ART state is forcibly terminated. The number of games will be lost, and the player will feel lost. However, for example, when an additional lottery in the ART state is won and the remaining number of games in the ART state exceeds the remaining number of games in the advantageous period (for example, “Y2” in FIG. 60), the transition to the fourth RT gaming state is made. By notifying the operation order to be performed, it is possible to shift to the fourth RT gaming state when the ART state is being performed. Then, when the advantageous period reaches “1500” game and the ART state is finished, if it is the fourth RT gaming state, the ART state is shifted to the special state, and the ART state is pulled back in the special state. To do. As a result, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to give a chance to re-enter the ART state in the special state, and the above-described loss feeling experienced by the player can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, as a result of winning the extra lottery, the number of games that can be played in the ART state exceeds the number of games that can be played in the advantageous period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of games (1400 games) is used regardless of whether or not the remaining number of games in the ART state exceeds the remaining number of games in the advantageous period. ) Has been reached, the operation order for transitioning to the 4RT gaming state may be notified, and the “Special Replay A” with the winning number “07” regardless of whether or not the predetermined number of games has been reached. ”To“ Special Replay D ”of the winning number“ 10 ”may be notified of the operation order to shift to the fourth RT gaming state. That is, these may be “satisfaction of a specific condition”.

  In addition, as a result of winning the extra lottery, the number of games that can be played in the ART state exceeds the number of games that can be played in the advantageous period. Even if the number of such games becomes the same value as the number of games that can be played during the advantageous period, the operation order for shifting to the fourth RT gaming state may be notified.

  In addition, the lottery value of “special replay” may have a setting difference, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win the “special replay”, or the lower the setting value, “ It may be set so that it is difficult to win the “special replay”. Thereby, a setting difference can be given to the transition to the “fourth RT gaming state”, and the range of gaming can be expanded.

(First animation diagram schematically showing the contents of the embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 52, the first animation diagram schematically showing the contents according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above will be described. Here, FIG. 52 shows a lighting mode in the payout number display 16 when winning the BB in the “normal period” (normal state) and winning the lottery for the “advantageous period” at the time of BB winning, The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like is shown.

  First, in FIG. 52 (A), “Watermelon + Red Seven BB” with the winning number “20” is won in the “Normal Period” (normal state), and “Watermelon + Red Seven BB” with the winning number “20” is won. It is assumed that the winning lottery for the “advantage period”, which is performed when the winner is won, is won. That is, in FIG. 52A, the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal carryover state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is “normal period”. Therefore, the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is not lit. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 31 in FIG. 52A displays an image (an image “chance!”) That suggests that a certain chance has arrived.

  Next, FIG. 52 (B) shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 52 (A), and the right reel 20, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 on the right side. It shows that the watermelon symbols are all stopped on the descending active line. Also, in FIG. 52 (B), since the lottery for shifting to the “advantageous period” is won in FIG. 52 (A), the next game (FIG. 52 (C)) is set to the “waiting period”. Is being processed.

  Next, FIG. 52 (C) shows that a new game has started (the “2” game starts), and the liquid crystal display device 31 wins a bonus together with a watermelon. The continuous production for informing whether or not there is started. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is a “normal carryover state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is a “standby period”. That is, even if the period managed by the main control board 300 becomes the “standby period”, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is not lit. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the bonus has been won and whether or not to shift to the advantageous period before the result of the continuous production started on the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified.

  Next, FIG. 52 (D) shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 52 (C). In the liquid crystal display device 31, the continuous effect is until the next game. A “NEXT” image indicating that the operation is continued is displayed. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal carryover state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “standby period”. 16a is not lit.

  Next, FIG. 52E shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the new game (the “3” game), and the liquid crystal display device 31 notifies the result of the continuous effect. It has been announced that the bonus was won. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal carryover state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “standby period”. 16a is not lit.

  Next, FIG. 52 (F) shows the state of the third stop of a new game (“4th game”). In the liquid crystal display device 31, an image corresponding to the “red seven” symbol is displayed. It is displayed that the “red seven” symbols are all stopped on the middle effective line in the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal normal BB state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantageous period”. Therefore, the seg 16a of the payout number display unit 16 is turned on based on the fact that the “red seven” symbols are aligned and stopped on the active line. That is, although the “advantage period” is won in FIG. 52A, the “advantage period” start timing (the timing at which the counter of “1500” game is set) is determined by sandwiching the “standby period” therebetween. This can be when the bonus symbol is displayed on the active line. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the “1500” game in the “advantageous period” from being eroded by the game (game) shown in FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (E). In other words, by providing a “standby period”, it is possible to prevent the above-described results from being grasped before the result notification of the continuous performance, and the “1500” game of the “advantage period” becomes a game up to the result notification. It has the effect of preventing erosion.

(Second animation diagram schematically showing the contents of the embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 53, the second animation diagram schematically showing the contents according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above will be described. Here, FIG. 53 shows the lighting mode of the payout number display 16 and the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like when the ART state is won in the “normal period” (normal state).

  First, in FIG. 53 (A), in the “normal period” (normal state), “watermelon” with winning number “08” was won and “watermelon” with winning number “08” was won. It is assumed that the lottery for the “advantage period” is won (the transition destination is “ART ready state”). That is, in FIG. 53A, the state managed by the main control board 300 is a “precursor state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is a “normal period”. Therefore, the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is not lit. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 31 in FIG. 53A displays an image (an image “chance!”) Suggesting that a certain chance has come.

  Next, FIG. 53 (B) shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 53 (A), in the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 on the right. It shows that the watermelon symbols are all stopped on the descending active line. Also, in FIG. 53 (B), since the lottery for shifting to the “advantageous period” in FIG. 53 (A) is won, the “advantageous period” is set from the next game (FIG. 53C). (For example, the advantageous period counter “1500” is set) and the segment in the payout number display 16 is used to notify that the next game (FIG. 53C) is “an advantageous period”. 16a is lit.

  Next, FIG. 53C shows that a new game has started (the “2” game starts). In the liquid crystal display device 31, “XX mode” corresponding to the precursor state is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is a “predictive state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is continuously lit. Thereby, the player can grasp that it is in an advantageous state.

  Next, FIG. 53D shows that a new game has started (for example, the “16th game” has started), and the liquid crystal display device 31 has started a continuous effect. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “precursor state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is continued. Is lit.

  Next, FIG. 53E shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 53D, and the liquid crystal display device 31 notifies the result of the continuous effect. , It is reported that the state is shifted to the ART state. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “precursor state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is continued. Is lit.

  Next, FIG. 53 (F) shows that a new game has started (for example, the “17th game” has started), and the liquid crystal display 31 displays an image indicating the ART ready state. Has been. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART ready state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantageous period”. 16a is lit.

(Third animation diagram schematically showing the contents of the embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 54, the third animation diagram schematically showing the contents according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above will be described. Here, FIG. 54 shows a lighting mode in the payout number display 16 and a display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like when the chance state is won in the “normal period” (normal state).

  First, in FIG. 54 (A), in the “normal period” (normal state), “watermelon” with winning number “08” was won and “watermelon” with winning number “08” was won. It is assumed that the lottery for the “advantage period” is won (the transition destination is “chance state”). That is, in FIG. 54A, the state managed by the main control board 300 is a “precursor state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is a “normal period”. Therefore, the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is not lit. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 31 in FIG. 54A displays an image (an image “chance!”) Suggesting that a certain chance has arrived.

  Next, FIG. 54 (B) shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 54 (A), and the right reel 20, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 on the right side. It shows that the watermelon symbols are all stopped on the descending active line. Further, in FIG. 54 (B), since the winning lottery for shifting to the “advantageous period” in FIG. 54 (A) is won, the “advantageous period” is determined from the next game (FIG. 54 (C)). (For example, the advantageous period counter “1500” is set) and the segment in the payout number display 16 is used to notify that the “advantage period” is reached from the next game (FIG. 54C). 16a is lit.

  Next, FIG. 54C shows that a new game has started (the “2” game starts). In the liquid crystal display device 31, the “OO mode” corresponding to the precursor state is shown. Is displayed. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is a “predictive state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is continuously lit. Thereby, the player can grasp that it is in an advantageous state.

  Next, FIG. 54D shows that a new game has started (for example, the “16th game” has started), and the liquid crystal display device 31 has started a confrontation effect. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “precursor state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is continued. Is lit.

  Next, FIG. 54E shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 54D, and the liquid crystal display device 31 notifies the result of the confrontation effect. (The display of the “draw” image suggests a transition to the “chance state”). At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “precursor state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is continued. Is lit.

  Next, FIG. 54 (F) shows that a new game has started (for example, the “17” game starts), and the liquid crystal display device 31 displays an image indicating the chance state. ing. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “chance state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantage period”, so the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is continued. Is lit.

  Here, FIG. 53 illustrates a case where the ART state, which is an “advantageous period”, is won in the “normal period” (normal state). In FIG. 54, in the “normal period” (normal state), “ He explained the case where he was elected to the chance state, which is the “favorable period”. In other words, the “advantage period” is transferred to an ART ready state in which the transition to the ART state is confirmed and a chance state, and there are a plurality of states. 16 is used. In addition, FIG. 55 illustrates a case where a high probability state that is an “advantageous period” is won, and notification of an advantageous period is also performed using the payout number display 16 in the high probability state. . Further, in FIGS. 53 and 54, the state is shifted to the ART ready state or the chance state in which the transition to the ART state is confirmed through the precursor state which is an “advantageous period”. The transition to the high probability state, which is the “advantageous period”, without going through the precursor state. Therefore, the transition destination as the “advantageous period” has a plurality of states, and depending on the transition destination, there are those that pass through the precursor state and those that do not pass through the precursor state. On the other hand, the notification that it is an advantageous period is common in that all cases are performed using the payout number display 16.

(4th animation figure which shows the content of embodiment roughly)
Next, based on FIG. 55, the 4th animation figure which showed schematically the content which concerns on 1st Embodiment mentioned above and 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. Here, FIG. 55 shows the lighting mode of the payout number display 16 and the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like when the high probability state is won in the “normal period” (normal state).

  First, in FIG. 55 (A), in the “normal period” (normal state), “watermelon” with winning number “08” is won and “watermelon” with winning number “08” is won. It is assumed that the lottery for the transition to the “favorable period” is won (the transition destination is “high probability state”). That is, in FIG. 55A, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal period”. Therefore, the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is not lit. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 31 in FIG. 55A displays an image (an image “chance!”) Suggesting that a certain chance has come.

  Next, FIG. 55 (B) shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 55 (A), and the right reel 20, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 on the right side. It shows that the watermelon symbols are all stopped on the descending active line. In FIG. 55B, the state managed by the main control board 300 is a “high probability state”. Also, in FIG. 55 (B), since the winning lottery for shifting to the “advantageous period” in FIG. 55 (A) is won, the next game (FIG. 55 (C)) is set to the “advantageous period”. (For example, the advantageous period counter “1500” is set) and the segment in the payout number display 16 is notified to notify that the “advantage period” is reached from the next game (FIG. 55C). 16a is lit.

  Next, FIG. 55C shows that a new game has started (the “2” game starts). In the liquid crystal display device 31, the “XX stage” corresponding to the high-probability state is shown. Is displayed. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is a “high probability state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is continuously lit. Thereby, the player can grasp that it is in an advantageous state.

  Next, FIG. 55 (D) shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 55 (C), and the liquid crystal display device 31 continues to correspond to the high probability state. The image “XX stage” is displayed. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is a “high probability state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is continuously lit. Thereby, the player can grasp that it is in an advantageous state.

  Next, FIG. 55E shows that a new game has started (for example, the “20” game has started). In the game, the winning number “16” in “5th push order” It is assumed that “Bell” was won. On the payout number display 16, an operation sequence “32” is displayed to notify that the right stop button 13 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the left stop button 11 is operated last. And the lighting of the segment 16a which notifies that it is an "advantageous period" is performed. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 31, an image indicating that the right stop button 13 is operated first, an image indicating that the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the left stop button 11 being operated last. The image shown is displayed. In FIG. 55, “push order bell” is used as a falling combination. Therefore, in FIG. 55 (E), it is decided to shift from the “high probability state” to the “normal state” in the falling lottery performed by winning the “5th push order bell” of the winning number “16”. Is assumed. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantageous period”, but the next game (FIG. 55F) To “normal period” (for example, initialization of the advantageous period counter “1500”) is performed. In this way, in the “high probability state” that is the “advantageous period”, the operation order is notified “1” times for the “winning role for paying out the maximum payout number”, and then the “advantageous period” is set. I try to end it.

  Next, FIG. 55 (F) shows that a new game has started (for example, the “20th game” has started), and the liquid crystal display device 31 displays an image corresponding to the normal state. Has been. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is a “normal state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is a “normal period”. Therefore, the seg 16a in the payout number display 16 is not lit continuously. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain that the advantageous state was complete | finished. FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the case where “push order bell” is used as a falling combination. However, the case where “normal replay” is used as a falling combination will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 59. To do.

(Fifth animation diagram schematically showing the contents of the embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 56, the 5th animation figure which showed the content which concerns on 1st Embodiment mentioned above and 2nd Embodiment schematically is demonstrated. Here, FIG. 56 shows the lighting mode of the payout number display 16 and the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like when BB is won in the “advantageous period” (ART state).

  First, in FIG. 56 (A), it is assumed that in the “advantage period” (ART state), the winning number “16” “5th push order bell” has been won. The operation sequence “32” is displayed to notify that the right stop button 13 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the left stop button 11 is operated last. The segment 16a to be notified is turned on. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 31, an image indicating that the right stop button 13 is operated first, an image indicating that the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the left stop button 11 being operated last. The image shown is displayed. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is “advantageous period”.

  Next, FIG. 56 (B) shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 56 (A), and the middle stage in the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 is shown. This means that the bell symbols are all on the active line. In the liquid crystal display device 31, an image indicating that “a combination of symbols related to the correct answer bell” has been displayed is displayed. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is continued. Is lit.

  Next, FIG. 56 (C) shows that a new game has started (the “2” game starts). In the game, as the winning combination, “Watermelon +” with the winning number “20” is shown. It is assumed that “Red Seven BB” was won. That is, in FIG. 56C, the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART carry-over state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is lit. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 31 in FIG. 56C displays an image (an image “chance!”) That suggests that a certain chance has come.

  Next, FIG. 56 (D) shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 56 (C). In the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, the right It shows that the watermelon symbols are all stopped on the descending active line. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is an “ART carry-over state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantage period”. The segment 16a is lit.

  Next, FIG. 56E shows that a new game has started (the “3” game starts), and the liquid crystal display device 31 has started a continuous performance. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is an “ART carry-over state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantage period”. The segment 16a is lit.

  Next, FIG. 56 (F) shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the game started in FIG. 56 (E). In the liquid crystal display device 31, the continuous effect is continued until the next game. A “NEXT” image indicating that the operation is continued is displayed. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is an “ART carry-over state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantage period”. The segment 16a is lit.

  Next, FIG. 56 (G) shows the end of the payout process after the third stop of the new game (“4th game”), and the liquid crystal display device 31 notifies the result of the continuous effect. It has been announced that the bonus was won. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is an “ART carry-over state”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is an “advantage period”. The segment 16a is lit.

  Next, FIG. 56 (H) shows the state of the third stop of the new game (“5th game”). In the liquid crystal display device 31, an image corresponding to the “red seven” symbol is displayed. It is displayed that the “red seven” symbols are all stopped on the middle effective line in the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20. At this time, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal BB state during ART”, and the period managed by the main control board 300 is the “advantageous period”. Therefore, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is continuously lit.

  That is, in FIG. 52, when “BB” is won in the “normal period” (normal state) and it is decided to shift to the “favorable period” in response to the BB winning, the “normal carryover state” is set to “standby”. Period ". On the other hand, in FIG. 56, in the “advantage period” (ART state), when the BB is won, the “ART carry-over state” is continued as the “advantage period”. In other words, the “normal carryover state” and the “ART carryover state” are the same “third RT gaming state” and have the same basic performance, but are managed by the main control board 300 when winning the BB ( Depending on the normal period or the advantageous period, the carryover state differs depending on whether it is a “standby period” or an “advantageous period”. Furthermore, it can be said that the “standby period” is a period of transition only when it is determined that the BB is won in the “normal period” (normal state) and the transition to the “advantageous period” is determined when the BB is elected. .

(First time chart schematically showing the contents of the embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 57, the first time chart diagram schematically showing the contents according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above will be described. In FIG. 57, the “management period” of “X1” is a period managed by the main control board 300. Further, the “period indicator” of “X2” is the payout number indicator 16 (segment 16a). The “state” of “X3” is a state managed by the main control board 300.

  First, in “Y1”, the game is started by operating the start lever 10. The management period at this time is the “normal period”, the period indicator is “off”, and the state is “normal state”. Next, in “Y2”, a new game is started, and in this game, “Weak Cherry + Red Seven BB” of the winning number “21” is won and the winning combination is won. As a result of performing the period transition determination process, it is assumed that it is determined not to shift to the advantageous period. The management period at this time is a “normal period”, the period indicator is “off”, and the state is “normal carryover state”. Next, in “Y3”, “Red Seven BB” won in “Y2” is aligned and stopped on the active line. When “Red Seven BB” is aligned on the active line, the state becomes “normal bonus state” (normal normal BB state), but “Y2” is determined not to shift to the advantageous period. The management period is “normal period”, and the period indicator is “off”. In “normal bonus state” (normal normal BB state) performed between “Y3” and “Y4”, which will be described later, since the management period is the normal period, the lottery for shifting to the ART state is not performed. .

  Next, “Y4” indicates that the bonus started at “Y3” has ended. Then, continuing from “Y4”, the management period is “normal period”, the period indicator is “extinguished”, and the state is “normal state”. Next, it is assumed that a new game is started at “Y5” and that “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” is won in the game. The management period at this time is a “normal period”, the period indicator is “off”, and the state is “normal carryover state”. Next, “Y6” indicates that “Black Seven BB” won by “Y5” are aligned on the active line and stopped. When these “Black Seven BB” s are aligned on the active line, the status becomes “Normal Bonus State” (Normal Special BB State), and when “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” is won. Since it does not shift to the advantageous period, the management period is “normal period”, and the period indicator is “extinguished”. In the “normal bonus state” (normal special BB state) performed between “Y6” and “Y7”, which will be described later, a setting difference is set in the lottery value of “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19”. Therefore, the management period is “normal period”, and the lottery for shifting to the ART state is not performed.

  Next, “Y7” indicates that the bonus started at “Y6” has ended. Then, continuing from “Y7”, the management period is “normal period”, the period indicator is “extinguished”, and the state is “normal state”. Next, in “Y8”, a new game is started, and in this game, “Weak Cherry + Red Seven BB” with the winning number “21” is won and the winning combination is won. As a result of performing the period transition determination process, it is assumed that it is determined to shift to the advantageous period. The management period at this time is a “standby period”, the period indicator is “off”, and the state is “normal carryover state”. In addition, between “Y8” and “Y9”, which will be described later, for example, even if the “push order bell” is won, the operation order that can display “the combination of symbols related to the correct answer bell” on the active line is notified. Not. Next, in “Y9”, “Red Seven BB” won in “Y8” is aligned and stopped on the active line. When this “Red Seven BB” is aligned on the active line, the state becomes “normal bonus state” (normal normal BB state), and it is decided to shift to an advantageous period at “Y8”. The period is an “advantageous period” and the period indicator is “lit”. In “normal bonus state” (normal normal BB state) performed between “Y9” and “Y10” to be described later, the management period is an advantageous period, so the lottery for shifting to the ART state is performed.

  Next, “Y10” indicates that the bonus started at “Y9” has ended. Here, it is assumed that the ART state was not won in the “normal bonus state” (normal normal BB state) during the advantageous period between “Y9” and “Y10”. In this case, the “advantage period” is ended with the bonus end of “Y10”. From “Y10”, the management period becomes “normal period”, the period indicator turns “off”, and the state becomes “normal state”. Then, in “Y11”, a new game is started. In the game, “Red Seven BB” of the winning number “17” is won, and an advantageous period transition determination process performed by winning the winning combination As a result of this, it is assumed that it has been decided to shift to the advantageous period. The management period at this time is a “standby period”, the period indicator is “off”, and the state is “normal carryover state”. In addition, between “Y11” and “Y12”, which will be described later, for example, even if “push order bell” is won, the operation order that can display “a combination of symbols related to the correct bell” on the active line is notified. Not. Next, in “Y12”, “Red Seven BB” won in “Y11” is aligned and stopped on the active line. When this “Red Seven BB” is aligned on the active line, the state becomes “normal bonus state” (normal normal BB state), and “Y11” is determined to shift to an advantageous period. The period is an “advantageous period” and the period indicator is “lit”.

  Next, in “Y13”, when the “normal bonus state” (normal normal BB state) is performed, the special small role is won, and the ART state which is performed by winning the special small role is entered. It is assumed that the winning lottery was won. Note that when the “normal bonus state” (normal normal BB state) is being performed, even if the lottery for shifting to the ART state is won, the management period, the period indicator, and the state do not change. Next, “Y14” indicates that the bonus started at “Y12” has ended. Here, in the “normal bonus state” (normal normal BB state) performed between “Y12” and “Y14” in the advantageous period, the ART state is won, so the management period is “advantageous period” ”, The period indicator is“ lit ”, and the state is“ ART ready state ”. It should be noted that between “Y14” and “Y15”, which will be described later, for example, if “push order bell” is won, an operation order that can display “a combination of symbols related to the correct bell” on the active line is notified. For example, if the “push order replay” is won, the operation order capable of displaying “the combination of symbols related to transition replay” on the active line is notified. Then, if the “combination of symbols relating to transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the ART preparation state is shifted to the ART state.

  Next, “Y15” indicates that “a combination of symbols related to transition replay” is displayed on the active line. The management period at this time is the “advantageous period”, the period indicator is “lit”, and the state shifts to the “ART state”. It should be noted that between “Y15” and “Y16”, which will be described later, for example, if the “push order bell” is won, an operation order that can display “a combination of symbols related to the correct answer bell” on the active line is notified. The Next, it is assumed that a new game is started at “Y16” and that “weak cherry + red seven BB” with a winning number “21” is won in the game. The management period at this time is an “advantageous period”, the period indicator is “lit”, and the state is “the carry-over state during ART”. It should be noted that between “Y16” and “Y17”, which will be described later, for example, if “push order bell” is selected, an operation order that can display “a combination of symbols related to the correct answer bell” on the effective line is notified. The Next, in “Y17”, “Red Seven BB” won in “Y16” is aligned and stopped on the active line. When these “Red Seven BB” s are aligned on the active line, the state becomes “ART bonus state” (normal BB state during ART), the management period is “advantageous period”, and the period indicator is “lit”. Become. In “Y17” and “Y18”, which will be described later, the bonus period during ART (normal BB state during ART) is an advantageous period, and “weak cherry” with a winning number “21” is provided. Since “+ Red Seven BB” has no setting difference in the lottery value itself, an extra lottery for adding the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed.

  Next, “Y18” indicates that the bonus started at “Y17” has ended. Here, since “Y18” is a BB win when the ART state of “Y16” is being performed, the state is set to “ART ready state” in order to return to the ART state again, and the management period is “ “Advantageous period” and the period indicator is “lit”. It should be noted that between “Y18” and “Y19”, which will be described later, for example, if the “push order bell” is selected, the operation order that can display the “combination of symbols related to the correct answer bell” on the active line is notified. For example, if the “push order replay” is won, the operation order capable of displaying “the combination of symbols related to transition replay” on the active line is notified. Then, if the “combination of symbols relating to transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the ART preparation state is shifted to the ART state. Next, “Y19” indicates that “a combination of symbols related to transition replay” is displayed on the active line. The management period at this time is the “advantageous period”, the period indicator is “lit”, and the state shifts to the “ART state”. It should be noted that between “Y19” and “Y20”, which will be described later, for example, if “push order bell” is won, an operation order that can display “a combination of symbols related to the correct answer bell” on the effective line is notified. The

  Next, it is assumed that a new game is started at “Y20” and that “Black Seven BB” with a winning number “19” is won in the game. The management period at this time is an “advantageous period”, the period indicator is “lit”, and the state is “the carry-over state during ART”. Next, in “Y21”, “Black Seven BB” won in “Y20” is aligned and stopped on the active line. When these “Black Seven BB” s are aligned on the active line, the state becomes “ART Bonus State” (Special BB State during ART), and during the advantageous period, “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” is displayed. When winning, the lottery value of “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” has a setting difference even though it is an advantageous period, so it is added to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. There is no lottery. Next, “Y22” indicates that the bonus started at “Y21” has ended. Here, since “Y22” is a BB win when the ART state of “Y20” is being performed, the state is set to “ART ready state” in order to return to the ART state again, and the management period is “ “Advantageous period” and the period indicator is “lit”. In addition, between “Y22” and “Y23”, which will be described later, for example, if “push order bell” is selected, an operation order capable of displaying “combination of symbols related to correct answer bell” on the effective line is notified. For example, if the “push order replay” is won, the operation order capable of displaying “the combination of symbols related to transition replay” on the active line is notified. Then, if the “combination of symbols relating to transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the ART preparation state is shifted to the ART state.

  Next, “Y23” indicates that “a combination of symbols related to transition replay” is displayed on the active line. The management period at this time is the “advantageous period”, the period indicator is “lit”, and the state shifts to the “ART state”. It should be noted that between “Y23” and “Y24”, which will be described later, for example, if “push order bell” is selected, an operation order that can display “a combination of symbols related to the correct bell” on the active line is notified. The Next, in “Y24”, it represents that the number of games (games) in the advantageous period has reached “1500”, starting from “Y12”. In this case, if the ART state is being performed, initialization processing such as clearing the ART state game number counter is performed, the management period is set to “normal period”, and the period indicator is turned off. The state is assumed to be “normal state”.

(Second time chart schematically showing the contents of the embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 58, the second time chart diagram schematically showing the contents according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above will be described. Here, for example, FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating the lighting timing of the period indicator (payout number display 16) when it is determined to shift to the “advantageous period” in the “normal period” (normal state). .

  First, in “Y1”, when the start lever 10 is operated, for example, it is determined that the winning number “10” “strong cherry” is won, and the advantageous period transition determination process determines that the period is shifted to the advantageous period. Represents. Here, the “period indicator” of “X8” is turned ON, and the segment 16a of the payout number indicator 16 is lit. Note that the “period display” may be turned on anywhere from the timing “Y1” to the timing “Y7” described later. For example, “Y2” may be lit, or “Y1” and “Y2” may be lit. “Y2” represents the start of reel rotation, and “Y3” to “Y5” represent any stop operation of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, or right stop button 13, “Y6” represents a payout process, and “Y7” represents that a medal insertion operation in the game next to the game started at “Y1” can be performed. As described above, when the advantageous period is won, the transition to the advantageous period will start from the next game. It can be started after the operation.

  Note that a plurality of lighting timings of the period indicator may be provided. For example, in the “normal period” (normal state), the lighting timing of the period indicator may be different depending on whether the chance state is won or if the ART ready state is won. If comprised in this way, it can be suggested to which state of an advantageous period it transfers to the lighting timing of a period indicator.

  Note that the timing for turning on the period indicator in FIG. 58 and the effects performed by the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like can be configured as follows. For example, in the “normal period” (normal state), when the chance state is won, the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like is notified that the winning game is shifted to the precursor state. Then, at the timing after the notification is made, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 constituting the period display is turned on. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like informs that the transition is made to the precursor state between “Y1” and “Y2”, and the payout constituting the period indicator between “Y2” and “Y7” The segment 16a of the number display 16 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification of the transition to the precursor state performed by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like from being wasted, and the segmentation after the notification of the transition to the precursor state by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like is clearly performed. Since 16a will light, it can grasp | ascertain that the segment 16a is reporting the advantageous period. Moreover, you may make it light the segment 16a of the payout number display device 16 which comprises a period display device at the timing which performed the said alerting | reporting. Specifically, at the timing of “Y5”, the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like notifies that the state is shifted to the precursor state, and at the same timing, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 constituting the period display is turned on. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notification of shifting to the precursor state performed by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like from being wasted. Moreover, you may make it light the segment 16a of the payout number display device 16 which comprises a period display device at the timing before performing the said alerting | reporting. Specifically, at the timing of “Y5”, the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like notifies that the state is shifted to the precursor state, and at the timing of “Y1”, the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 constituting the period display is displayed. Light up. Thereby, the notification result notified by the liquid crystal display device 31 etc. can also be grasped in advance.

(Third time chart schematically showing the contents of the embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 59, description will be made on a third time chart diagram schematically showing the contents according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 59 shows the timing of shifting to the “normal period” (normal state with low probability) by winning the normal replay in the “favorable period” (high probability state) and the small payout of the maximum payout number. It is a figure which shows the relationship with establishment timing. “X1” and “X5” represent “winning roles” determined in the internal lottery process of FIG. 16, and “X2” and “X6” represent “states” managed by the main control board 300. "X3" and "X7" represent "periods" managed by the main control board 300, and "X4" and "X8" indicate whether the segment 16a of the payout number display 16 is lit or not lit. Indicates “period indicator”. For convenience, “normal state” is described as “low probability” in “state” of “X2” and “X6”.

  First, in FIG. 59 (A), in the game indicated by “Y1”, “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, and by winning the “watermelon”, the “high probability state” in the advantageous period is won. Is assumed. Therefore, in the game indicated by “Y2” that is the next game after the game indicated by “Y1”, “state” becomes “high probability state”, “period” becomes “advantageous period”, and “period indicator” becomes “ON”. (Lit). The “period indicator” of “X4” may be turned on at any timing between “Y1” and “Y2” (any timing from “Y1” to “Y7” shown in FIG. 58). , “Y1” and “Y2” also indicate “ON” with a dotted line. From the game indicated by “Y2” to the game indicated by “Y3”, the “high probability state”, “advantageous period”, and “period indicator” are maintained “ON (lighted)”. Note that the “high probability state” may include the minimum number of guaranteed games to stay (for example, “10” games). Then, in the game indicated by “Y3”, it is assumed that “normal replay” is determined as the winning combination, and that “normal replay” is won to win the falling lottery. Therefore, in the game indicated by “Y3”, the “state” is “low probability (normal state)”. Until “Y3”, the “push order bell”, which is the small payout of the maximum payout number, has not been won, so even if the “state” changes to “low probability (normal state)” "Remains an" advantageous period "and" period indicator "remains" ON (lit) ". That is, falling from the “high probability state” to the “low probability (normal state)” is not stipulated in the end condition of the “favorable period”, so the game indicated by “Y3” is indicated by “Y5”. Such a situation can occur until the game. In the game indicated by “Y4”, it is assumed that “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination and the operation order related to the “push order bell” is notified. In this case, since the end condition of the “favorable period” is satisfied, at the end of the game indicated by “Y4” (at the start of the game indicated by “Y5” of the next game indicated by “Y4”), The “period” is “normal period”, and the “period indicator” is “OFF (turned off)”. As described above, although the timing (game) for transitioning to the “high probability state” and the timing (game) for transitioning to the “advantageous period” are the same, the end condition of the “advantageous period” is a small maximum payout number. Before winning the “push order bell” that is a role, if the winning role that triggers the state transition is won and the state transition is performed, the timing (game) for the state transition, The timing (game) at which the period transitions is different.

  Next, in FIG. 59B, “Y1” and “Y2” are the same as those in FIG. In the game indicated by “Y3”, it is assumed that “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination and the operation order related to the “push order bell” is notified. In this case, the end condition of the “advantageous period” is satisfied. As described above, the “advantageous period” is after the notification of the operation order related to the “push order bell”, which is a small part of the maximum payout number. Can be terminated at an arbitrary timing (game), so the “advantage period” remains at the timing “Y3”. That is, at the timing indicated by “Y3”, the “state” becomes the “high probability state”, the “period” becomes the “advantageous period”, and the “period indicator” becomes “ON (lit)”. Then, in the game indicated by “Y4”, it is assumed that “normal replay” is determined as the winning combination, and that “normal replay” is won to win the falling lottery. Therefore, in the game indicated by “Y4”, the “state” becomes “low probability (normal state)”. Here, in the game indicated by “Y3”, since the termination condition of the “advantage period” is satisfied, in the game indicated by “Y4”, the “advantage period” is ended together with the transition of the “state”. , Transition to the “normal period”. Therefore, in the game indicated by “Y4”, the “state” becomes “low probability (normal state)”, the “period” becomes “normal period”, and the “period indicator” becomes “OFF (lights off)”. As described above, although the timing (game) for transitioning to the “high probability state” and the timing (game) for transitioning to the “advantageous period” are the same, the end condition of the “advantageous period” is a small maximum payout number. If the winning combination that triggers the state transition is won after winning the “push order bell” role, and the state transition occurs, the timing (game) for the state transition and the period The timing for making the transition (game) will be the same.

  As shown by “Y2” in FIG. 59, when “state” becomes “high probability state” and “period” becomes “advantageous period”, the “1500” game in the “advantageous period” is once. If the “push order bell” is not notified, the “advantage period” is ended with the digestion of the “1500” game. In the case where the “advantage period” is ended with the completion of the “1500” game, the “state” is assumed to be a “high probability state” or a “normal state”. Among these, when the “state” is the “high probability state”, the transition from the “high probability state” to the “normal state” may be made when the “advantage period” ends, or the “normal state” You may stay in the “high probability state” until you win the falling lottery without shifting to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the main CPU 301 in the main control board 300 has a management period as an advantageous period, and the management state is an ART state (second RT gaming state). As a result of winning the ART addition lottery, if the value of the ART state game number counter exceeds the value of the advantageous period counter, the internal lottery process of FIG. The process for informing the operation order in which the symbol combination related to the fourth RT transition replay is displayed on the effective line is performed. Then, when the ART state is ended with the end of the advantageous period, when the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is the fourth RT gaming state, the state after the end of the ART state is set to the special state. did. In the special state, as shown in FIG. 50, a lottery is performed with the same replay probability as in the ART state (second RT gaming state), and as shown in FIG. 51, the lottery is more than in the normal state (first RT gaming state). A lottery for shifting to the ART state (second RT gaming state) with a high probability was performed. As described above, when the value of the ART state game number counter exceeds the value of the advantageous period counter, the ART state is forcibly terminated at the end of the advantageous period, so that the surplus value (the number of games) is completely increased. Even if it is lost, a chance to shift to the ART state (second RT gaming state) is obtained in the special state, so that it is possible to prevent the possibility of causing a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 in the main control board 300 determines that every game in the ART state when BB is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process in FIG. 16 in the ART state process in FIG. The subtraction of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 to be subtracted is stopped. On the other hand, in the start time period management process of FIG. 27, even if BB is determined in the ART state, the subtraction of the advantageous period counter provided in the main RAM 303 is continuously subtracted every advantageous period including the ART state. (Especially do not stop subtraction). Therefore, in the carry-over state during ART, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of loss by subtracting the number of games in the ART state displayed on the display means. On the other hand, for the advantageous period counter that is subtracted every game during the advantageous period including the ART state, the number of games is continuously subtracted. When this advantageous period counter satisfies a predetermined period (for example, “1500” game), the advantageous period ends and the ART state controlled in the advantageous period also ends. By continuously subtracting the number of games, it is possible to provide care to the game store side. As described above, in a gaming machine that can win a special winning combination that can be carried over in a specific state such as ART, it is possible to balance the profits of the player and the game store.

  As shown in the modification of FIG. 45, in the ART state processing, when “Black Seven BB” with the winning number “19” is won, subtraction of the ART state game number counter is stopped in the ART carryover state. In such a case, the subtraction of the ART state game number counter may be stopped when another BB is won. In other words, the winning number “19” “Black Seven BB” is a winning combination having different lottery values depending on the set value, so that the higher the set value, the easier the subtraction of the ART state game number counter stops. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from having an advantage or disadvantage.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 of the main control board 300 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous period in the normal state processing of FIG. In the display time period management process of FIG. 35, the period managed by the main control board 300 is set as an advantageous period, and either “chance state” or “ART ready state” is determined as the advantageous period. In addition, in the process for the precursor state in FIG. 24, if the “chance state”, the number of precursor games is determined according to the “chance state”, and if it is “ART ready state”, the “ART ready state” is determined. The number of precursor games was decided. Then, after playing the determined number of precursor games, the game is shifted to the determined “chance state” or “ART ready state”. As described above, the “chance state” or the “ART ready state” determined as the breakdown of the advantageous period, even if the advantageous period from the next game is won, is determined according to each state. Since the transition is made after the number of games, in the precursor state, the player can be given a sense of expectation as to which of the “chance state” or “ART ready state” is won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a possibility that the game performance of the precursor game is impaired and the game interest is lowered.

  As shown in the modification of FIG. 40, the main CPU 301 of the main control board 300 determines the number of precursor games according to the “chance state” if it is “chance state” in the normal state processing of FIG. If it is “ART ready state”, the number of precursor games may be determined according to “ART ready state”. Also, as shown in the modified examples of FIGS. 42 and 44, after the third stop, if the “chance state”, the number of precursor games is determined according to the “chance state”, and the “ART ready state” is determined. If there is, the number of precursor games may be determined according to the “ART ready state”. In any case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 in the main control board 300 wins a BB other than “Black Seven BB” of the winning number “19” in the internal lottery process of FIG. 16 in the normal state process of FIG. When it is decided as a winning combination, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous period is performed, and when winning the transition lottery, until the combination of symbols related to the winning BB is displayed on the active line (normally carryover) In the state), the process managed by the main control board 300 is set as the standby period. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301 in the main control board 300 determines BB as a winning combination in the internal lottery process of FIG. 16 in the ART state processing of FIG. 21, the combination of symbols related to the winning BB is on the active line. Until it is displayed (during the carry-over state during ART), the period managed by the main control board 300 is continued to be an advantageous period. In addition, the main CPU 301 in the main control board 300 notifies that it is an advantageous period using the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 when the period managed in the main control board 300 is an advantageous period. . As described above, in the normal state, even if the above-mentioned BB is won and the advantageous period is won, the normal carry-over state is managed as a standby period, and notification using the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is not performed. become. Therefore, even if a continuous effect for notifying whether or not BB is won is executed across a plurality of games during the normal carryover state, the result is first played by the notification mode of the segment 16a in the payout number display 16. There is an effect that even if the above-mentioned continuous performance is executed, it is not wasted. On the other hand, when the BB is won in the ART state, the carry-over state during ART is continuously managed as an advantageous period, so the segment 16a in the payout number display 16 is continuously used from the ART state. Notification will be performed. Therefore, even if a continuous effect for notifying whether or not BB is won is executed across a plurality of games during the carry-over state during ART, the result is first determined by the notification mode of the segment 16a on the payout number display 16. There is an effect that it is not wasted even if the above-mentioned continuous performance is executed without being grasped by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gameability in the bonus carry-over state from being impaired and the possibility of causing a decrease in the gaming interests.

  Also, even if you win the BB in the normal state and win in the advantageous period, it will be managed as a waiting period in the normal carryover state, and the combination of symbols related to the selected BB will be displayed on the active line By setting the advantageous period, in addition to the above-mentioned effects, the count of the “1500” game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous period, is counted when the combination of symbols related to the winning BB is displayed on the active line It is possible to prevent the “1500” game from being eroded by the number of games in the standby period.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the main CPU 301 in the main control board 300 wins the “normal replay” with the winning number “01” in the internal lottery process of FIG. 16 in the high probability state. When it is determined as, using the falling lottery table shown in FIG. 11 (B), a lottery to determine whether or not to shift from the high probability state to the normal state is performed. Then, when the falling lottery is won (the third condition is established), the high probability state is shifted to the normal state. Also, in the advantageous period that triggered the winning of the high probability state, in the internal lottery process of FIG. 16, the “first pushing order bell” with the winning number “12” and the “second pushing order bell with the winning number“ 13 ”. ”,“ 3rd pushing order bell ”with winning number“ 14 ”,“ 4th pushing order bell ”with winning number“ 15 ”, and“ 5th pushing order bell ”with winning number“ 16 ” The operation order in which “the combination of symbols related to the correct answer bell” related to the determined “push order bell” is displayed on the active line is notified once, and the operation order is notified once (second) The fact that the condition was satisfied was defined as the end condition of the advantageous period. Thus, even if the high probability state ends early by winning the falling lottery, the advantageous period is “push order bell” regardless of the completion of the “1500” game (the establishment of the first condition). "The combination of symbols related to the correct answer bell" can be ended by notifying once of the operation sequence displayed on the active line, so that the advantageous period is extended to the upper limit number of times ("1500" game). Can be reduced, and the possibility of giving the player a sense of incongruity can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, symbols arranged on each reel (designs arranged on symbol positions “00” to “20” of each reel) constitute a plurality of symbols of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 constitute a plurality of reels according to the present invention in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on the peripheral surface.

  In this embodiment, the start switch 10sw constitutes a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes a winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the start operation detected by the starting operation detecting means of the present invention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes a reel rotation control unit that performs control to rotate a plurality of reels based on the start operation detected by the start operation detection unit of the present invention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels of the present invention, and stop operation means that can be stopped by the player. Configure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels of the present invention, and stop operation means that can be stopped by the player. Configure.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 is rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the stop operation means of the present invention being stopped and the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. Stop control means for controlling to stop the reel is configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes determination means for determining a combination of symbols displayed on a predetermined effective line as a result of stopping all of the plurality of reels by the stop control means of the present invention. .

  In the present embodiment, the first RT gaming state constitutes the first gaming state of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the second RT gaming state constitutes the second gaming state of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth RT gaming state constitutes the third gaming state of the present invention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 has the first gaming state, the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the game that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state according to the present invention. The game state control means is configured to control a third game state that is different from the second game state.

  In the present embodiment, “special replay A”, “special replay B”, “special replay C”, and “special replay D” constitute a special winning combination of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines that the special winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means in the second gaming state of the present invention, and the symbol combination related to the special winning combination is displayed by the determining means. When it is determined, a gaming state transition control means is configured to control transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 has a normal period of the present invention and a special period that is different from the normal period and can be ended based on a game of a predetermined period. The period control means for controlling is configured.

  Further, the normal period in the present embodiment constitutes the normal period of the present invention, and the advantageous period in the present embodiment constitutes the special period of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 is in a normal state according to the present invention, a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and can be ended based on a predetermined end condition being satisfied. The state control means for controlling is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the ART state constitutes a specific state of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the ART state game number counter is set to “0” as a result of the game being performed and the counter being subtracted from the situation where the value is set in the ART state game number counter. The predetermined end condition of the present invention is configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines that the special period of the present invention is not satisfied when a predetermined condition in the specific state is not satisfied when a game for a predetermined period is performed in the special period. Completion control means for ending the control in the specific state upon completion is configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an ART state extra lottery is performed, and as a result of adding the number of ART state games to the ART state game number counter, the value set in the ART state game number counter after the addition is an advantageous period. If it exceeds the value set in the counter, it constitutes the establishment of a specific condition of the present invention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the payout number display device 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 have determined that a special winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific state of the present invention. Based on the above, an operation order notifying means for notifying the operation order of the stop operation means related to the combination of symbols relating to the special winning combination is configured. In addition, any of these may be sufficient as an operation order alerting | reporting means, and these combinations may be sufficient.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 controls the transition from the specific state to the special state different from the specific state when the third gaming state is controlled when the control of the specific state of the present invention is terminated. The state transition control means is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the special state constitutes the special state of the present invention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes a transfer lottery means for performing a shift lottery for a new special period in the special state of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine used for a swivel type gaming machine (slot machine) equipped with an ART has been described, but it may be applied to a gaming machine equipped with an AT or RT.

  In this embodiment, the ART is managed on the main control board 300, but the ART may be managed on the sub-control board 400.

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine used for a spinning machine (slot machine) has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a pachinko gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, or an arrangement ball gaming machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 2 Cabinet 3 Front door 4 Grip part 5 Key hole 6 Medal insertion slot 7 BET button 7sw BET switch 8 MAXBET button 8sw MAXBET switch 9 Settlement button 9sw Settlement switch 10 Start lever 10sw Start switch 11 Left stop button 11sw Left stop switch 12 Middle stop button 12sw Middle stop switch 13 Right stop button 13sw Right stop switch 14 Selector 14s Selector sensor 15 Stored number display 16 Discharged number display 16a Seg 17s Door open / close sensor 18 Left reel 19 Middle reel 20 Right reel 21 Production button 21s Production Button sensor 22 Cross key 22s Cross key sensor 23 Display window 24 Receptacle unit 25 Medal payout port 26 First BET lamp 27 Second BET lamp 28 Third BET lamp 29 Moni Display unit 30 external concentration terminal board 31 liquid crystal display device 32 LED
33 Speaker 37 Push order notification lamp (left)
38 Push order notification lamp (middle)
39 Push order notification lamp (right)
100 status board 150 reel control board 151 left stepping motor 152 middle stepping motor 153 right stepping motor 154s left reel sensor 155s middle reel sensor 156s right reel sensor 200 power board 201 power button 201sw power switch 202 hopper 202s hopper sensor 300 main control board 301 Main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Main random number generator 400 Sub control board 401 Sub CPU
402 Sub ROM
403 Sub RAM
404 Sub-random number generator 500 Production control board 501 Production control CPU
502 Production control ROM
503 Production control RAM
504 CGROM
505 Sound source IC
506 Sound source ROM
507 VDP

Claims (1)

A plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on the circumferential surface;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Reel rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
Stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and capable of being stopped by a player;
Stop control means for performing control to stop the reel being rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the stop operation of the stop operation means and the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means When,
Determination means for determining a combination of symbols displayed on a predetermined active line as a result of all the reels being stopped by the stop control means;
A first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and is different from the second gaming state Gaming state control means for controlling the third gaming state;
In the second gaming state, when the special winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, and the determination means determines that the combination of symbols related to the special winning combination is displayed, the second gaming state Gaming state transition control means for controlling transition to the third gaming state from
A period control means for controlling a normal period and a special period that is different from the normal period and can be ended based on a game of a predetermined period;
State control means for controlling a normal state and a specific state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and can be ended based on a predetermined end condition being satisfied;
If the predetermined end condition in the specific state is not satisfied when a game of the predetermined period is performed in the special period, the control of the specific state is ended at the end of the special period. Termination control means;
When a specific condition is established in the specific state, the stop operating means according to the combination of symbols related to the special winning combination is determined based on the determination of the special winning combination by the winning combination determining means. An operation order notifying means for informing the operation order;
When the third gaming state is controlled when the specific state ends, state transition control means for performing transition control from the specific state to a special state different from the specific state;
In the special state, transition lottery means for performing a transition lottery to the new special period;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: